Hager

101132 SEA cover_2012-13.
pdf 1 9/24/12 5:38 PM
Hager Electro System Pte Ltd Tel + (65) 6383 1030

21, Serangoon North Ave 5, Fax + (65) 6383 0230
#06-03, Ban Teck Han Building Web www.hager.sg
Singapore 554864 Email sales@hager.sg

Hager Engineering (M) Sdn. Bhd Tel + (603) 7859 1935
Level 5, Lot 8 Jalan Astaka U8/84 Fax + (603) 7859 1945
Seksyen U8, Bukit Jelutong Web www.hager.com.my
40150 Shah Alam Email general@hager.my
Selangor Darul Ehsan
Malaysia
Hager Electro Ltd (Vietnam) Tel + (848) 3811 3549/50/51
,ULYN` KPZ[YPI\[PVU )\PSKPUN H\[VTH[PVU catalogue

Floor 3, CNC Building Fax + (848) 3811 3552
No.8-10 Nguyen Ba Yuyen Street, Web www.hager.hk
Ward 12 Tan Binh District, Email sales@hager.hk
Ho Chi Minh City,
Vietnam
,ULYN`
KPZ[YPI\[PVU
catalogue
)\PSKPUN
H\[VTH[PVU
catalogue

SEA_General catalogue_2012_08
2012_SEA_001-13 copy_2009_SEA_01-10 31/8/12 11:10 AM Page 1
Dear Friends and Partners,
Hager stands for sustainability and our E3 Initiative is an

excellent example of this. Fully aware of our responsibility
to both society and the environment, we are proud to
make a contribution to the better use of the limited
available resources. It is a belief that plays a vital role in
all our new developments. The three Es, by the way, stand
for the categories of "ethics, environment and energy".
And behind each category there is an actual catalogue of
measures to which Hager is expressly committed, measures
including: Investors in People certification (IIP), an
employee development programme; the United Nations
Global Compact initiative, which the Hager Group joined
in 2007; and the environmental standard ISO 14000, to
which most of our sites are already certified to. In this
respect, ecological development and production
technologies are given as much careful consideration as
to the products themselves that make a contribution to
make better use of the resource electricity.
Innovation, customer proximity, simplicity and reliability

are the very basis of the Hager brand. We keep in close
contact with our customers, regularly surveying their wishes
and needs before incorporating that feedback into the
development of our new systems. The same applies to this
catalogue which we have designed for you as a practical
tool.
Why not have a browse and find out for yourself?
Best regards,
Daniel Hager
The partner for smart

solutions you can trust
Hager is a full-range supplier of electrical installation systems for building, residential and commercial
properties. For decades, Hager has been synonymous with an extensive and complete offering. Highest
quality, cutting-edge products, modularity, ease of installation, ease of use, excellent service and
sophisticated design are the features that distinguish Hager.
Hager: a brand meeting your expectations

As a specialist in
• power distribution,
• cable management and room connection systems,
• switch programmes and smart building automation as well as safety technology such as alarm systems, smoke detectors and
motion detectors.
Hager the supplier for professionals – is a synonym for top quality and innovative technology, as well as good customer
relations and reliability. All of which make Hager the partner for smart solutions, you can trust.
New ideas for the customers’ benefit

Innovations and the systematic enhancement of the products 80 per cent of Hager products and systems are younger than
and systems are key features of the Hager brand. It has always five years. This high degree of innovation enables the users
been our goal to use new designs and improvements to stay to meet various new challenges effectively. The strong demand
ahead of developments. for innovations and enhancements is a good indicator for the
customer-oriented policy of the Hager brand also resulting in
The use of innovations and new technologies at Hager is a high turnover at wholesalers.
always customer-driven. Every year, Hager evaluates thousands
of customer contacts, result-ing in detailed knowledge of its
customers’ needs in order to work efficiently and successfully.
Based on this knowledge, Hager develops the innovative
solutions that are so characteristic for the Hager brand.
Ease of installation, ease of use, intuitive user interfaces,
modularity and durability are brand values that guarantee
highest quality throughout in Hager systems.
2
A flourishing group
Hager belongs to the Hager Group, which is a family owned
business with a more than fifty-year tradition. As a global
player, the company has about 11,400 employees and a
turnover of more than 1.55 billion Euro in 2011.
To-day, the Hager Group offers more than 74.000 items.
www.hagergroup.net
3
Safe distribution of
energy, concentration Provision of energy and
of communication data where they are
technology. required.
Energy Cable
distribution management
A clear structure -
Hager’s range of products
Hager has divided its extensive range of products into four areas of application, each marked with a
different colour, to help you finding the right product and solution for your individual needs.
As the leading specialist in the field of electrical installations residential and commercial buildings, the
Hager brand provides you with everything from one source: systems and solutions – highest quality,
reliable and easy to install.
4
Switching with style - Safety and security items

Smart Building for buildings, residents
automation and valuables
Building Security
automation
www.hagergroup.net
5
101132 SEA_001-13_2009_SEA_01-10 9/12/12 9:17 AM Page 6
Small enclosures
Connection
Protection devices
Control and signaling
Energy & lighting control
Power interface programming
Lighting Control
Automatic detection
mini gamma | cosmos and icos | IU metal |

vector | golf | vega | volta flush | orion plus A.1
metal IP65
insulated busbars - prong | insulated busbars

fork | connection blocks | brass terminals B.1
miniature circuit breakers | remote control auxiliary |

auxiliaries and accessories for MCBs & RCCBs |
RCD add-on blocks | 2 & 4 pole residual current
devices (RCCBs/ELCBs) | RCCBs selective product C.1
range | combined MCB/RCD (RCBO) | RCBO
electronic | earth leakage relays & torroidal transformers
BS 1361 / HRC fuse carries and fuse |

switchfuse | motor starters | surge protection
devices (SPD) | switches disconnectors |
2 way/centre off change-over modular C.39
switches | enclosed fuse combination switches
and switch disconnectors | control relays
latching relays | relays & interface relays |

contactors D.1
time switches and twilight switches selection chart |

analogue time switches modular | digital time
switches/ time lag switches | delay timers | indicator
lights | push button | transformers, bells and buzzers | D.21
thermostats | analogue/ digital voltmeters, ammeters |
selector/ multi-function switches | energymeters
dimmers | energency lighting module | twlight

switches | light sensitives switches, 2 channel
up to 20kLx | remote telephone interface
D.61
motion, 360˚, presence, smoke detector |

floodlight with motion detector D.81
Catalogue references index
Cat.ref. Page No. Cat.ref. Page No. Cat.ref. Page No. Cat.ref. Page No. Cat.ref. Page No.
5 A A C C
52031 D.86 AD916B C.28 AF970B C.28 CC225B C.26 CZ007 C.26
52032 D.86 AD920B C.28 AF975B C.28 CC425B C.26 CZ008 C.26
52035 D.86 AD925B C.28 AF982B C.28 CD216B C.26 CZN005 C.26
52038 D.86 AD932B C.28 AF990B C.28 CD225B C.26 CZN005 C.27
52541 D.86 AD940B C.28 AZ002 C.28 CD240B C.26 CZN006 C.26
52542 D.86 AD956B C.28 AZ002 C.29 CD263B C.26 CZN006 C.27
52545 D.86 AD960B C.28 CD280B C.26
52546 D.86 AD966B C.28 B CD284B C.26 E
AD970B C.28 BC225N C.23 CD416B C.26 EC050 D.57
A AD975B C.28 BD226N C.23 CD425B C.26 EC051 D.57
AC107 C.30 AD982B C.28 BD241N C.23 CD440B C.26 EC100 D.57
AC122 C.30 AD990B C.28 BD264N C.23 CD463B C.26 EC150 D.57
AC506B C.29 AE106Z C.30 BD326N C.23 CD480B C.26 EC152 D.57
AC510B C.29 AE110Z C.30 BD341N C.23 CD484B C.26 EC350 D.57
AC516B C.29 AE116Z C.30 BD364N C.23 CE225B C.26 EC352 D.57
AC916B C.28 AE140Z C.30 BDC280E C.24 CE284B C.26 EC372 D.57
AC966B C.28 AE145Z C.30 BDC380E C.24 CE425B C.26 EE002 D.71
AD104 C.30 AE150Z C.30 BDC480E C.24 CE440B C.26 EE003 D.71
AD105 C.30 AE506B C.29 BDH280E C.24 CE463B C.26 EE100 D.71
AD109 C.30 AE520B C.29 BE225N C.23 CF225B C.26 EE170 D.71
AD120 C.30 AE570B C.29 BF226N C.23 CF440B C.26 EE701 D.71
AD125 C.30 AE960B C.28 BF341N C.23 CG225B C.26 EE806 D.81
AD185 C.30 AE990B C.28 BFC480E C.24 CG425B C.26 EE812 D.85
AD187 C.30 AF120Z C.30 BFH480E C.24 CG440B C.26 EE813 D.85
AD188 C.30 AF125Z C.30 BG264N C.23 CG463B C.26 EE815 D.85
AD191 C.30 AF506B C.29 BP264N C.23 CH225J C.27 EE826 D.81
AD506B C.29 AF510B C.29 BP364N C.23 CH440J C.27 EE827 D.81
AD510B C.29 AF516B C.29 BP464N C.23 CN240B C.27 EE828 D.81
AD516B C.29 AF520B C.29 BR264N C.23 CN440B C.27 EE830 D.81
AD532B C.29 AF556B C.29 BTC280E C.24 CP440B C.27 EE841 D.81
AD556B C.29 AF560B C.29 BTC380E C.24 CP463B C.27 EE855 D.81
AD560B C.29 AF566B C.29 BTC480E C.24 CP480M C.27 EE856 D.81
AD566B C.29 AF570B C.29 BTH280E C.24 CQ240J C.27 EE860 D.81
AD582B C.29 AF956B C.28 CQ463J C.27 EE871 D.81
AD906B C.28 AF960B C.28 C CZ001 C.17 EE905 D.69
AD910B C.28 AF966B C.28 CC216B C.26 CZ001 C.27 EE910 D.69
8
E E E E E
EE960 D.69 EPN512 D.3 ERL263S D.12 ESD264 D.8 EV108 D.62
EF203E D.29 EPN513 D.3 ERL418 D.7 ESD325S D.10 EV108 D.64
EG003 D.30 EPN515 D.3 ERL425 D.11 ESD425S D.10 EVN002 D.62
EG003U D.30 EPN516 D.3 ERL425S D.12 ESD426S D.10 EVN004 D.62
EG004 D.30 EPN518 D.3 ESC001 D.14 ESD427 D.9 EVN011 D.62
EG005 D.30 EPN519 D.3 ESC002 D.14 ESD427S D.10 EVN012 D.62
EG006 D.30 EPN520 D.3 ESC003 D.14 ESD428 D.9 EZN001 D.37
EG007 D.30 EPN521 D.3 ESC080 C.53 ESD428S D.10 EZN002 D.37
EG010 D.29 EPN522 D.3 ESC080 D.14 ESD440S D.10 EZN003 D.37
EG071 D.29 EPN523 D.3 ESC125 D.8 ESD463S D.10 EZN004 D.37
EG103B D.29 EPN524 D.3 ESC126 D.8 ESD464 D.9 EZN005 D.37
EG103E D.29 EPN525 D.3 ESC225 D.8 ESL125 D.8 EZN006 D.37
EG103V D.29 EPN526 D.3 ESC225S D.10 ESL225 D.8
EG110 D.29 EPN528 D.3 ESC226 D.8 ESL225S D.10 F
EG170 D.29 EPN540 D.3 ESC227 D.8 ESL226 D.8 FL102A A.25
EG203B D.29 EPN541 D.3 ESC240 D.8 ESL227 D.8 FL104A A.25
EG210 D.29 EPN546 D.3 ESC240S D.10 ESL240 D.8 FL105A A.25
EG270 D.29 EPN548 D.3 ESC241 D.8 ESL240S D.10 FL110A A.25
EG293B D.30 EPS450 D.35 ESC263 D.8 ESL241 D.8 FL112A A.25
EG403E D.30 ERC125 D.11 ESC263S D.10 ESL263 D.8 FL117A A.25
EG493E D.30 ERC216 D.7 ESC264 D.8 ESL263S D.10 FL118A A.25
EH010 D.22 ERC217 D.7 ESC325 D.8 ESL264 D.8 FL119A A.25
EH071 D.22 ERC218 D.7 ESC325S D.10 ESL425S D.10 FL120A A.25
EH110 D.22 ERC225 D.11 ESC340 D.8 ESL426 D.9 FL122A A.25
EH110 D.22 ERC225S D.12 ESC340S D.10 ESL426S D.10 FL123A A.25
EH110A D.22 ERC226 D.11 ESC363 D.8 ESL427 D.9 FL124A A.25
EH111A D.22 ERC240S D.12 ESC425 D.9 ESL428 D.9 FL126A A.25
EH171A D.22 ERC263 D.11 ESC425 D.9 ESL428S D.10 FL127A A.25
EH209 D.22 ERC325 D.11 ESC426 D.9 ESL463S D.10 FL130A A.25
EH210 D.22 ERC325S D.12 ESC426 D.9 ESM225 D.8 FL152A A.25
EH211 D.22 ERC416 D.7 ESC426S D.10 ESM227 D.8 FL154A A.25
EH271 D.22 ERC418 D.7 ESC427 D.9 ESM440 D.9 FL155A A.25
EH710 D.24 ERC425 D.11 ESC427S D.10 ETC225 D.13 FL160A A.25
EH710A D.24 ERC425S D.12 ESC428 D.9 ETC225S D.13 FL162A A.25
EH711 D.24 ERC426 D.11 ESC428S D.10 ETC226 D.13 FL167A A.25
EH770 D.24 ERC427 D.11 ESC440 D.9 ETC227 D.13 FL168A A.25
EH771 D.24 ERC428 D.11 ESC440 D.9 ETC325 D.13 FL169A A.25
EH900 D.24 ERD216 D.7 ESC440S D.10 ETC325S D.13 FL170A A.25
EH901 D.22 ERD217 D.7 ESC441 D.9 ETC340 D.13 FL172A A.25
EH902 D.22 ERD218 D.7 ESC442 D.9 ETC363 D.13 FL173A A.25
EK081 D.45 ERD218S D.7 ESC443 D.9 ETC425 D.13 FL174A A.25
EK082 D.45 ERD225 D.11 ESC463 D.9 ETC425S D.13 FL175A A.25
EK083 D.45 ERD240 D.11 ESC463 D.9 ETC440 D.13 FL176A A.25
EK186 D.45 ERD240S D.12 ESC463S D.10 ETC463 D.13 FL177A A.25
EK187 D.45 ERD263 D.11 ESC464 D.9 EU100 C.60 FL178A A.25
EMN001 D.35 ERD263S D.12 ESC465 D.9 EU101 C.60 FL180A A.25
EMN003 D.35 ERD418 D.7 ESC466 D.9 EU102 C.61 FL204B A.27
EN146 D.7 ERD425 D.11 ESD125 D.8 EU103 C.61 FL209B A.27
EN415 D.7 ERD425S D.12 ESD225 D.8 EU300 C.60 FL213B A.27
EPN050 D.4 ERL216 D.7 ESD225S D.10 EU301 C.60 FL216B A.27
EPN051 D.4 ERL217 D.7 ESD226 D.8 EU302 C.61 FL221B A.27
EPN052 D.4 ERL218 D.7 ESD227 D.8 EV100 D.62 FL229B A.27
EPN053 D.4 ERL218S D.7 ESD240 D.8 EV100 D.63 FL254B A.27
EPN501 D.3 ERL225 D.11 ESD240S D.10 EV102 D.62 FL259B A.27
EPN503 D.3 ERL240 D.11 ESD241 D.8 EV102 D.63 FL263B A.27
EPN510 D.3 ERL240S D.12 ESD263 D.8 EV106 D.62 FL266B A.27
EPN511 D.3 ERL263 D.11 ESD263S D.10 EV106 D.64 FL271B A.27
9
F F H H H
FL279B A.27 FL960A A.25 HLF299S C.12 HMX132 C.15 HZF204 C.57
FL352B A.27 FL96Z A.26 HLF399S C.12 HMX163 C.15 HZF207 C.57
FL402A A.28 FL980A A.30 HLF499S C.12 HMX220 C.15
FL402A A.28 FL981A A.30 HMB180 C.13 HMX225 C.15 I
FL404A A.28 FL98Z A.27 HMB190 C.13 HMX232 C.15 IU108S A.5
FL407A A.28 FL992A A.30 HMB199 C.13 HMX240 C.15 IU13S A.5
FL417A A.28 HMB399 C.13 HMX325 C.15 IU54S A.5
FL419A A.28 G HMB480 C.13 HMX332 C.15 IU65S A.5
FL450A A.28 GD102B A.3 HMB490 C.13 HMX340 C.15 IU72S A.5
FL472A A.28 GD102P A.3 HMB499 C.13 HMX350 C.15 IU90S A.5
FL473A A.28 GD102 TA.3 HMC180 C.13 HMX363 C.15
FL474A A.28 GD104B A.3 HMC190 C.13 HMX410 C.15 J
FL475A A.28 GD104P A.3 HMC199 C.13 HMX416 C.15 JAB302S C.58
FL476A A.28 GD104T A.3 HMC280 C.13 HMX420 C.15 JAB303S C.58
FL477A A.28 GD106B A.3 HMC290 C.13 HMX425 C.15 JAB306S C.58
FL479A A.28 GD106P A.3 HMC299 C.13 HMX432 C.15 JAB306S-IP55 C.58
FL480A A.28 GD106T A.3 HMC380 C.13 HMX440 C.15 JAB310S C.58
FL481A A.28 GD108B A.3 HMC390 C.13 HMX450 C.15 JAB310S-IP55 C.58
FL483A A.28 GD108P A.3 HMC399 C.13 HMX463 C.15 JAB402S C.58
FL500A A.30 GD108T A.3 HMC480 C.13 HR440 C.33 JAB403S C.58
FL501A A.30 GD110B A.3 HMC490 C.13 HR441 C.33 JAB406S C.58
FL502A A.30 GD110P A.3 HMC499 C.13 HR500 C.33 JAB406S-IP55 C.58
FL502B A.27 GD110T A.3 HMD180 C.13 HR502 C.33 JAB410S C.58
FL503A A.30 GZ04E A.3 HMD190 C.13 HR510 C.33 JAB410S-IP55 C.58
FL512E A.28 GZ04N A.3 HMD199 C.13 HR522 C.33 JAC316S C.58
FL520E A.28 GZ07E A.3 HMD280 C.13 HR523 C.33 JAC316S-IP55 C.58
FL521E A.28 GZ07N A.3 HMD290 C.13 HR525 C.33 JAC416S C.58
FL522E A.28 GZ104S A.3 HMD299 C.13 HR700 C.33 JAC416S-IP55 C.58
FL522E A.28 GZ106S A.3 HMD380 C.13 HR741 C.33 JAE320S C.58
FL527B A.27 GZ108S A.3 HMD390 C.13 HR742 C.33 JAE320S-IP55 C.58
FL532E A.28 GZ110S A.3 HMD399 C.13 HR743 C.33 JAE325S C.58
FL670A A.26 HMD480 C.13 HR744 C.33 JAE325S-IP55 C.58
FL672E A.29 H HMD490 C.13 HR745 C.33 JAE420S C.58
FL672Z A.29 HLE180S C.12 HMD499 C.13 HR830 C.33 JAE420S-IP55 C.58
FL70Z A.29 HLE190S C.12 HMK180 C.14 HR831 C.33 JAE425S C.58
FL712E A.30 HLE199S C.12 HMK190 C.14 HR832 C.33 JAE425S-IP55 C.58
FL713E A.30 HLE280S C.12 HMK199 C.14 HR833 C.33 JAF340S C.58
FL714E A.30 HLE290S C.12 HMK280 C.14 HZ021 C.58 JAF440S C.58
FL715E A.30 HLE299S C.12 HMK290 C.14 HZ023 C.58 JAG331A C.58
FL71Z A.29 HLE380S C.12 HMK299 C.14 HZ036 C.58 JAG331S-IP55 C.58
FL80Z A.26 HLE390S C.12 HMK380 C.14 HZ046 C.58 JAG340S-IP55 C.58
FL81Z A.27 HLE399S C.12 HMK390 C.14 HZC201 C.58 JAG431A C.58
FL85Z A.26 HLE480S C.12 HMK399 C.14 HZC202 C.58 JAG431S-IP55 C.58
FL863Z A.27 HLE490S C.12 HMK480 C.14 HZC203 C.58 JAG440S-IP55 C.58
FL874A A.26 HLE499S C.12 HMK490 C.14 HZC204 C.58 JAH363S C.58
FL957A A.25 HLF180S C.12 HMK499 C.14 HZC205 C.58 JAH363S-IP55 C.58
FL957A A.25 HLF190S C.12 HMX110 C.15 HZC206 C.58 JAH380S C.58
FL958A A.25 HLF199S C.12 HMX116 C.15 HZF201 C.57 JAH390S C.58
FL959A A.25 HLF280S C.12 HMX120 C.15 HZF202 C.57 JAH392S C.58
FL95Z A.26 HLF290S C.12 HMX125 C.15 HZF203 C.57 JAH463S C.58
10
J K L L M
JAH463S-IP55 C.58 KB163B B.3 LB118 C.39 LF416G C.40 ML520J C.10
JAH480S C.58 KB163I B.3 LC163 C.41 LF416M C.40 ML525J C.10
JAH490S C.58 KB163N B.3 LC332 C.41 LF420G C.40 ML532J C.10
JAH492S C.58 KB163P B.3 LC363 C.41 LF420M C.40 MM501N C.42
JE003 A.29 KB190B B.3 LC363N C.41 LF425G C.40 MM502N C.42
JFB202S C.57 KB190C B.3 LC563 C.41 LF425M C.40 MM503N C.42
JFB203S C.57 KB263A B.3 LC732 C.41 LF432G C.40 MM504N C.42
JFB302S C.57 KB263C B.3 LF300G C.40 LF432M C.40 MM505N C.42
JFB303S C.57 KB280B B.3 LF300M C.40 LF440G C.40 MM506N C.42
JFB402S C.57 KB363A B.3 LF301G C.40 LF440M C.40 MM507N C.42
JFB403S C.57 KB363B B.3 LF301M C.40 LF445G C.40 MM508N C.42
JFD206S C.57 KB363C B.3 LF301PV C.44 LF445M C.40 MM509N C.42
JFD306S C.57 KB380B B.3 LF302G C.40 LF450G C.40 MM510N C.42
JFD406S C.57 KB463A B.3 LF302M C.40 LF450M C.40 MM511N C.42
JFE210S C.57 KB463C B.3 LF302PV C.44 LF516G C.40 MM512N C.42
JFE310S C.57 KB480B B.3 LF303PV C.44 LF516M C.40 MM513N C.42
JFE410S C.57 KD190B B.4 LF304G C.40 LF520G C.40 MT106A C.4
JFG312S C.57 KDN163A B.4 LF304M C.40 LF520M C.40 MT110A C.4
JFG316S C.57 KDN163B B.4 LF304PV C.44 LF525G C.40 MT116A C.4
JFG320S C.57 KDN180A B.4 LF305PV C.44 LF525M C.40 MT120A C.4
JFG325S C.57 KDN180B B.4 LF306G C.40 LF532G C.40 MT125A C.4
JFG412S C.57 KDN263A B.4 LF306M C.40 LF532M C.40 MT132A C.4
JFG416S C.57 KDN263B B.4 LF306PV C.44 LF540G C.40 MT140A C.4
JFG420S C.57 KDN280A B.4 LF308G C.40 LF540G C.40 MT150A C.4
JFG425S C.57 KDN280B B.4 LF308M C.40 LF540M C.40 MT163A C.4
JFH331S C.57 KDN363A B.4 LF308PV C.44 LF540M C.40 MT206A C.4
JFH340S C.57 KDN363B B.4 LF310G C.40 LF550G C.40 MT210A C.4
JFH431S C.57 KDN380A B.4 LF310M C.40 LF550M C.40 MT216A C.4
JFH440S C.57 KDN380B B.4 LF310PV C.44 LF563G C.40 MT220A C.4
JFI363S C.57 KDN463A B.4 LF312G C.40 LF563M C.40 MT225A C.4
JFI380S C.57 KDN463B B.4 LF312M C.40 LF580G C.40 MT232A C.4
JFI463S C.57 KDN480A B.4 LF312PV C.44 LF580M C.40 MT240A C.4
JFI480S C.57 KDN480B B.4 LF315PV C.44 LF590G C.40 MT250A C.4
JP024H A.5 KF50S B.3 LF316G C.40 LF590M C.40 MT263A C.4
JZA700 C.58 KF81A B.3 LF316M C.40 LF599G C.40 MT306A C.4
JZA701 C.57 KF82A B.3 LF316PV C.44 LF599M C.40 MT310A C.4
JZA701 C.58 KF83A B.3 LF320G C.40 LR601 C.41 MT316A C.4
JZA702 C.57 KZ021 B.3 LF320M C.40 LR602 C.41 MT320A C.4
JZA702 C.58 KZ022 B.3 LF320M C.40 LR603 C.41 MT325A C.4
JZA703 C.57 KZ023A B.3 LF320PV C.44 LR604 C.41 MT332A C.4
KZ024 B.3 LF325G C.40 LR612 C.41 MT340A C.4
K KZ060 B.6 LF325M C.40 LR701 C.41 MT350A C.4
K018F B.5 KZD012 B.6 LF325M C.40 LR702 C.41 MT363A C.4
K023F B.5 KZD013 B.6 LF325PV C.44 LR703 C.41 MU102A C.4
K024F B.5 KZD014 B.6 LF332G C.40 LR704 C.41 MU104A C.4
K025F B.5 KZN021 B.4 LF332M C.40 LR712 C.41 MU106A C.4
K037F B.5 KZN023 B.4 LF332PV C.44 LS501 C.39 MU110A C.4
K140 B.6 KZN024 B.4 LF402G C.40 LS502 C.39 MU116A C.4
K142 B.6 LF402M C.40 LS503 C.39 MU120A C.4
K143 B.6 L LF404G C.40 LS504 C.39 MU125A C.4
K144 B.6 L153 C.39 LF404M C.40 LS512 C.39 MU132A C.4
K145 B.6 L155 C.39 LF406G C.40 LS531 C.39 MU140A C.4
K148 B.6 L156 C.39 LF406M C.40 LZ060 D.14 MU150A C.4
K151 B.6 L158 C.39 LF408G C.40 LZ060 D.62 MU163A C.4
K156 B.6 L501PV C.44 LF408M C.40 MU202A C.4
K158 B.6 L502PV C.44 LF410G C.40 M MU204A C.4
K159 B.6 LB113 C.39 LF410M C.40 ML506J C.10 MU206A C.4
K160 B.6 LB115 C.39 LF412G C.40 ML510J C.10 MU210A C.4
K162 B.6 LB116 C.39 LF412M C.40 ML516J C.10 MU216A C.4
11
M M N N N
MU220A C.4 MZ201 C.17 NC106A C.5 NDN120A C.7 NRN140 C.9
MU306A C.4 MZ520N C.42 NC163A C.5 NDN202A C.7 NRN206 C.9
MU340A C.4 MZN120 C.53 NC206A C.5 NDN220A C.7 NRN240 C.9
MY101E C.3 MZN121 C.8 NC220A C.5 NDN240A C.7 NRN300 C.9
MY120E C.3 NC302A C.5 NDN306A C.7 NRN320 C.9
MY125E C.3 N NC303A C.5 NDN310A C.7 NRN325 C.9
MY132E C.3 NB106A C.5 NC304A C.5 NDN316A C.7 NRN332 C.9
MY301E C.3 NB306A C.5 NC420A C.5 NDN440A C.8
MY302E C.3 NB310A C.5 NC425A C.5 NDN450A C.8 P
MY303E C.3 NB316A C.5 NC432A C.5 NDN463A C.8 P031F A.5
MY304E C.3 NB320A C.5 NC440A C.5 NRN100 C.9 P032H A.5
MY305E C.3 NB325A C.5 NC450A C.5 NRN101 C.9 P032W A.5
MY306E C.3 NB332A C.5 NC463A C.5 NRN102 C.9 PL871Z A.29
MY310E C.3 NB340A C.5 NDN100A C.7 NRN103 C.9
MY316E C.3 NB350A C.5 NDN101A C.7 NRN104 C.9 S
MY320E C.3 NB363A C.5 NDN102A C.7 NRN106 C.9 SB432PV C.44
MY325E C.3 NC100A C.5 NDN103A C.7 NRN110 C.9 SBN116 C.53
12
101132 SEA_001-13_2009_SEA_01-10 9/12/12 9:17 AM Page 13
S S S U V
SBN180 C.53 SM103E D.55 ST305 D.43 UC969 A.28 VS108TM A.13
SBN190 C.53 SM150 D.50 ST312 D.43 UZ01V1 A.29 VS108TVA A.4
SBN199 C.53 SM151 D.52 ST313 D.43 UZ225V1 A.29 VS112PM A.13
SBN216 C.53 SM200 D.55 ST314 D.43 UZ225V2 A.29 VS112PVA A.4
SBN225 C.53 SM201 D.55 ST315 D.43 VS112TM A.13
SBN232 C.53 SM202 D.55 SU212 D.43 V VS112TVA A.4
SBN240 C.53 SM203 D.55 SU213 D.43 VB18J A.17 VS118PM A.14
SBN263 C.53 SM250 D.50 SU214 D.43 VB18W A.17 VS118PVA A.4
SBN280 C.53 SM400 D.50 SU215 D.43 VB36J A.17 VS118TM A.14
SBN290 C.53 SM401 D.52 SVN121 D.40 VB36W A.17 VS118TVA A.4
SBN299 C.53 SM500 D.50 SVN122 D.40 VB54J A.17 VS122PM A.14
SBN316 C.53 SM501 D.52 SVN123 D.40 VB54W A.17 VS122TM A.14
SBN325 C.53 SM600 D.50 SVN124 D.40 VB72J A.17 VS212PM A.13
SBN332 C.53 SM601 D.52 SVN125 D.40 VB72W A.17 VS212TM A.13
SBN340 C.53 SPD015D C.46 SVN126 D.40 VE103U A.7 VS218PM A.14
SBN363 C.53 SPD040N C.46 SVN127 D.40 VE106U A.7 VS218TM A.14
SBN390 C.53 SPD215D C.46 SVN129 D.40 VE112U A.7 VS312TM A.13
SBN416 C.53 SPD415D C.46 SVN132 D.40 VE212U A.7 VS318TM A.14
SBN432 C.53 SPM220E C.47 SVN134 D.40 VE312U A.7 VS412TM A.13
SBN440 C.53 SPM240E C.47 SVN135 D.40 VE318U A.7 VS418PM A.14
SBN463 C.53 SPM265E C.47 SVN136 D.40 VE412U A.7 VS418TM A.14
SBN480 C.53 SPM420E C.47 SVN221 D.40 VF104PM A.11 VU12NSG A.21
SBN490 C.53 SPM440E C.47 SVN222 D.40 VF104PVA A.4 VU24NSG A.21
SBN499 C.53 SPM465E C.47 SVN311 D.41 VF104TM A.11 VU36NSG A.21
SBV325 C.44 SPN015R C.46 SVN312 D.41 VF104TVA A.4 VU48NSG A.21
SF263 C.54 SPN040C C.46 SVN321 D.41 VF108PM A.11 VZ230N A.21
SF463 C.54 SPN040D C.46 SVN322 D.41 VF108PVA A.4 VZ303 A.5
SFH125 C.54 SPN040N C.46 SVN331 D.41 VF108TM A.11 VZ308 A.5
SFH132 C.54 SPN040R C.46 SVN332 D.41 VF108TVA A.4 VZ309 A.5
SFH225 C.54 SPN065N C.46 SVN341 D.41 VF112PM A.11 VZ310 A.17
SFH232 C.54 SPN065R C.46 SVN342 D.41 VF112PVA A.4 VZ405N A.21
SFM125 C.54 SPN140C C.46 SVN351 D.41 VF112TM A.11
SFM132 C.54 SPN165R C.45 SVN352 D.41 VF112TVA A.4
SFT125 C.54 SPN208 C.48 SVN371 D.41 VF118PM A.12
SFT132 C.54 SPN208S C.48 SVN373 D.41 VF118TM A.12
SFT140 C.54 SPN215R C.46 SVN391 D.41 VF122PM A.12
SFT225 C.54 SPN240R C.46 SVN411 D.41 VF122TM A.12
SFT240 C.54 SPN408S C.48 SVN422 D.41 VF212TM A.11
SFT440 C.54 SPN440R C.46 SVN433 D.41 VF218TM A.12
SK001 D.53 SPN465R C.45 SVN441 D.41 VF312PM A.11
SK600 D.53 SPN504 C.48 SVN452 D.41 VF312TM A.11
SK600 D.53 SPN505 C.48 SVN461 D.41 VF318PM A.12
SK601 D.53 SPV025 C.46 SVN462 D.41 VF318TM A.12
SK602 D.53 SPV025E C.46 SVN463 D.41 VF412PM A.11
SK603 D.53 SR051 D.52 SVN464 D.41 VF412TM A.11
SK604 D.53 SR101 D.52 VF418PM A.12
SK606 D.53 SR151 D.52 T VF418TM A.12
SM005 D.50 SR200 D.52 TG500A D.91 VP032Z A.30
SM015 D.50 SR250 D.52 TG500B D.91 VS104PM A.13
SM020 D.52 SR300 D.52 TG500C D.91 VS104PVA A.4
SM030 D.50 SR400 D.52 TG501A D.91 VS104TM A.13
SM050 D.50 SR600 D.52 TG501B D.91 VS104TVA A.4
SM100 D.50 ST301 D.43 TG501C D.91 VS108PM A.13
SM102E D.55 ST303 D.43 TH020B D.76 VS108PVA A.4
13
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 14
Small enclosures
Easy to use
As a specialist for housing and commercial premises enclosures, Hager provides a large range of
products. Plastic or steel enclosures, flush or surface mounting, there is always a Hager solution to
answer your need.
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 15
mini Gamma enclosures A3
cosmos and Icos enclosures A4
IU metal enclosures A5
vector enclosures - IP55 A7
golf enclosures A9
vega enclosures A17
volta flush enclosures A20
orion plus metal IP65 enclosures A23

2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 16
mini gamma enclosures
Enclosures Options :
1 row for 2 to 10 ❚ - Keylock
- Plain or transparent door
Supplied without terminals - Terminal block and connection
assemblies
Marking labels
Sealing grommets to maintain
Class II IEC 60 695-2-1/0
and 60 695-2-1/1
Designation Cat. Ref.
1 row, 2 ❚ GD102B
l. 55 x h. 160 x p. 82 mm
1 row, 4 ❚ GD104B
l. 110 x h. 180 x p. 82 mm
GD102B
1 row, 6 ❚ GD106B
l. 148 x h. 180 x p. 82 mm
1 row, 8 ❚ GD108B
l. 182 x h. 180 x p. 82 mm
1 row, 10 ❚ GD110B
l. 218 x h. 180 x p. 82 mm
GD108B
Designation Characteristics Cat. Ref. Cat. Ref.

plain transpar.
door door
Doors for : GD 102N GP102P GP102T

With integrated handle
GD 104N GP104P GP104T

GD106B
Key lock ---For plain or transparent door VZ313 VZ313
N - terminal 4 connections 2x16mm2 + 2x10mm2 GZ04N

N - terminal 7 connections 3x16mm2 + 4x10mm2 GZ07N
GP108P
PE- terminal 4 connections 2x16mm2 + 2x10mm2 GZ04E
PE- terminal 7 connections 3x16mm + 4x10mm
2 2
GZ07E
Terminal support for GD 104 GZ104S

GP110T
A.3
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 17
cosmos enclosures
Cosmos flush mounting - terminals neutral & earth fixed Rated insulated Voltage IP rating
enclosure with hinged cover to the base with metallic screw AC 400V/ 50Hz IP30 without door
1 row for 4, 8 and 14 ❚ IP40 with door
Supplied with: Wall boxes symmetrically, therefore Rated current up to 63A
- plain/ transparent door for they can be turned around by 180˚ In accordance with
devices up to 61mm Insulation Class II IEC 61439-3
installation depth Cable entries:
- DIN profile for modular knock-out type, top, bottom, Colour IEC 60 695-2-1/0
devices 46mm under the cover side cover tube/cable entry RAL9010 and 60 695-2-1/1
Designation Pack Cat. Ref. Cat. Ref.

qty. Plain Transpar.
1 row, 4 ❚ N : 2 x 16 + 2 x 10mm2 1 VF104PVA VF104TVA

w.123 x h.165 x d.59 E : 2 x 16 + 2 x 10mm2
(wall recess)
VF104PVA VF104TVA
1 row, 8 ❚ N : 3 x 16 + 3 x 10mm2 1 VF108PVA VF108TVA

w.195 x h.165 x d.59 E : 3 x 16 + 3 x 10mm2
(wall recess)
VF108PVA VF108TVA
1 row, 12 ❚ + 2 ❚ N : 5 x 16 + 5 x 10mm2 1 VF112PVA VF112TVA

w.287 x h.165 x d.59 E : 5 x 16 + 5 x 10mm2
(wall recess)
VF112PVA VF112TVA
icos enclosures
Surface mounting enclosure - terminals neutral & earth fixed Rated insulated Voltage IP rating
with hinged cover to the base with metallic screw AC 400V/ 50Hz IP30 without door
1 row for 5, 8, 14 and 20 ❚ IP40 with door
Supplied with: Base can be turned around by Rated current up to 63A
- plain/ transparent door for 180˚ for wall mounting In accordance with
devices up to 61mm Insulation Class II IEC 61439-3
installation depth Cable entries:
- DIN profile for modular knock-out type, top, bottom, Colour IEC 60 695-2-1/0
devices 46mm under the cover side cover trunking/ cable entry RAL9010 and 60 695-2-1/1
Designation Pack Cat. Ref. Cat. Ref.

qty. Plain Transpar.
1 row, 4 ❚ + 1 ❚ N : 2 x 16 + 2 x 10mm2 1 VS104PVA VS104TVA

w.137 x h.188 x d.93 E : 2 x 16 + 2 x 10mm2
1 row, 8 ❚ N : 4 x 16 +5 x 10mm2 1 VS108PVA VS108TVA

w.210 x h.188 x d.93 E : 4 x 16 + 5 x 10mm2
VS112TVA
1 row, 10 ❚ + 4 ❚ N : 1 x 25 + 5 x 16mm2 + 5 x 10 mm2 1 VS112PVA VS112TVA

w.302 x h.188 x d.93 E : 1 x 25 + 5 x 16mm2 + 5 x 10mm2
VS118PVA
1 row, 16 ❚ + 4 ❚ N : 1 x 25 + 8 x 16mm2 + 8 x 10mm2 1 VS118PVA VS118TVA

w.410 x h.188 x d.93 E : 1 x 25 + 8 x 16mm2 + 8 x 10mm2
VS118TVA
A.4
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 18
IU enclosures
- IU metal enclosure IP41 - Powder coating to RAL 9002
- With rectangular knock-out - Removable top and bottom

plates
- Reversible door
- 1.2mm sheet steel, epoxy

for trunking
Designation Modules Row Cat. Ref.
1 row, 13 ❚ N: 13 x 16mm2 13 1 IU13S

w.355 x h.275 x d.110 E: 13 x 16mm2
2 rows, 26 ❚ N: 2 x (13 x 16mm2) 26 2 IU26S

w.355 x h.380 x d.110 E: 26 x 16mm2
3 rows, 39 ❚ N: 3 x (13 x 16mm2) 39 3 IU39S

w.355 x h.530 x d.110 E: 39 x 16mm2
IU18S 4 rows, 52 ❚ N: 4 x (13 x 16mm2) 52 4 IU52S

w.355 x h.680 x d.110 E: 2 x (26 x 16mm2)
5 rows, 65 ❚ N: 4 x (13 x 16mm2) 65 5 IU65S

w.355 x h.830 x d.110 E: 2 x (26 x 16mm2)
1 row, 18 ❚ N: 18 x 16mm2 18 1 IU18S

w.475 x h.275 x d.110 E: 18 x 16mm2
2 rows, 36 ❚ N: 2 x (18 x 16mm2) 36 2 IU36S

w.475 x h.380 x d.110 E: 36 x 16mm2
3 rows, 54 ❚ N: 3 x (18 x 16mm2) 54 3 IU54S

w.475 x h.530 x d.110 E: 36 x 16mm2 + 18 x 16mm2
4 rows, 72 ❚ N: 4 x (18 x 16mm2) 72 4 IU72S

w.475 x h.680 x d.110 E: 2 x (36 x 16mm2)
5 rows, 90 ❚ N: 5 x (18 x 16mm2) 90 5 IU90S

w.475 x 830 x d.110 E: 2 x (36 x 16mm2) + (18 x 16mm2)
6 rows, 108 ❚ N: 6 x (18 x 16mm2) 108 6 IU108S

w.475 x 975 x 110 E: 3 x (36 x 16mm2)
Blanking clips
1/2 module (white) 100 1/2 (8.7mm) P031F
One module (white) 50 1 (17.5mm) P032F
One module (light grey) 100 1 (17.5mm) P032H
P031 - P032 1 row 24 module (white) 100 JP024
JP024
Key lock Supplied with 1 key VZ303

Replaces original catch
Plastic latch VZ308
Hinge VZ309
A.5
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 19
dimensions
mini gamma
A References Dimension (mm) Fixing

A H Depth E F
GD102B 55 160 82 31 94
GD104B 110 180 82 86 114
F
H
GD106B 148 180 82 124 114

GD108B 182 180 82 157 114
GD110B 218 180 82 194 114
E
cosmos
References Dimension (mm)

H W D
VF104PVA/TVA 185 143 59
VF108PVA/TVA 185 215 59
VF112PVA/TVA 185 307 59
icos
References Dimension (mm)

H W D
VS104PVA/TVA 188 137 93
VS108PVA/TVA 188 210 93
VS112PVA/TVA 188 302 93
VS118PVA/TVA 188 410 93
IU
Reference No of Rows Dimension (mm)

W H D
IU13S 1 355 275 110
IU26S 2 355 380 110
IU39S 3 355 530 110
IU52S 4 355 680 110
IU65S 5 355 680 110
IU18S 1 475 275 110

IU36S 2 475 380 110
IU54S 3 475 530 110
IU72S 4 475 680 110
IU90S 5 475 830 110
IU108S 6 475 980 110
A.
A.6
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 20
vector enclosures - IP55
Surface mounting enclosures With premarked knock outs for

with transparent doors bushes or cable glands M20,
1 to 4 rows from 2 to 48 ❚, M25, M32, M40 and M50;
1 to 3 rows from 18 to 54 ❚. supplied with a set of cable
bushes
Adjustable DIN rail for shoulder
measurement 47 and 63 mm, Colour : light grey RAL7035
transparent hinged cover (2 to nominal voltage : Ui 400V~
10 ❚) or door (12 to 54 ❚), nominal current : 63A at
lateral knock outs for cable entry 230/400V~
or coupling pieces:
Pg16 for VE110 and VE116 IEC 60 695-2-1/0 and
Pg21 for VE112 to VE318. 60 695-2-1/1
VE 212U
IP55 IK07 3 + 6 + 10
IK08 12 + 18
Insulation class : class II 쵭
Designation Pack Cat. Ref.

Qty.
1 row 2 + 1 ❚ N : 1x25 + 3x16mm2 1 VE103U

w.111 x h.175 x d.93 E : 1x25 + 5x16mm2
1 row, 4 + 2 ❚ N : 1x25 + 5x16mm2 1 VE106U

VE 106U w.165 x h.190 x d.113 E : 1x25 + 7x16mm2
1 row, 8 + 2 ❚ N : 1x25 + 9x16mm2 1 VE110U

w.237 x h.210 x d.114 E : 1x25 + 11x16mm2
1 row, 12 ❚ N : 1x25 + 10x16mm2 1 VE112U

w.310 x h.302 x d.151 E : 1x25 + 13x16mm2
2 rows, 24 ❚ N : 1x25 + 16x16mm2 1 VE212U

w.310 x h.427 x d.151 E : 1x25 + 16x16mm2
3 rows, 36 ❚ N : 1x25 + 19x16mm2 1 VE312U

w.310 x h.552 x d.151 E : 1x25 + 19x16mm2
VE 312U
4 rows, 48 ❚ 1 VE412U
w.310 x h.677 x d.151 N : 2x (1x25 + 19x16 mm2)
E : 2x (1x25 + 19x16mm2)
1 row, 18 ❚ N : 1x25 + 16x16mm2 1 VE 118U

418 x 302 x 151 E : 1x25 + 16x16mm2
2 rows, 36 ❚ N : 1x25 + 19x16mm2 1 VE 218U

418 x 452 x 151 E : 1x25 + 19x16mm2
3 rows, 54 ❚ N : 2x (1x25 + 19x16mm2) 1 VE 318U

418 x 602 x 151 E : 2x (1x25 + 19x16mm2)
VE 218U
A.7
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 21
vector enclosures - IP55
VE 212U - 2 rows 24 ❚ Dimensions
References Enclosure sizes Wall box

A 151 R A H E F
VE103U 3❚ 1 111 175 - 119
73,5 VE106U 6❚ 1 165 190 108 126

VE110U 10 ❚ 1 237 210 180 136
VE112U 12 ❚ 1 310 302 230 155
59
H
150
VE212U 24 ❚ 2 310 427 230 280
VE312U 36 ❚ 3 310 552 230 405
47,5
VE412U 48 ❚ 4 310 677 230 550
VE118U 18 ❚ 1 418 302 338 155
E VE118U 36 ❚ 2 418 452 338 305

VE118U 54 ❚ 3 418 602 338 455
Connection assembly
Mounting on insulating support at both end of the chassis

1. additional connection assembly : VZ 403 or VZ 428
2. insulated terminal VZ 743
Enclosure Knock outs Supplied cable bushes

Reference
VE103U 2 x M20 3 x M20
VE106U 1 x M20 + 1 x M25 + 1 x M30/32 2 x M20 + 2 x M25 + 1 x M32
VE110U 1 x M20/32 + 1 x M25 + 3 x M20 4 x M20 + 2 x M25 + 1 x M32
VE112U 2 x M20/32/40 + 2 x M25/32 + 3 x M25 + 6 x M20 10 x M20 + 2 x M25 + 1 x M32
A.
A.8
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 22
Small enclosure
golf VF & VS
The enclosure for flush or surface mounting installation
When building or renovating residential buildings, compact solutions are often required for electrical
installations. The golf VF & VS small enclosure is particularly suitable thanks to its ease of mounting
on walls.
The small enclosure is easily and swiftly mounted and offers space for a large number of modular
devices. Thanks to a patented covenient cable management system, cables can be laid safely and swiftly.
Your benefits Characteristics

• Easy installation of the flush / surface-mounted enclosure • Flush/ Surface mounted
- can be turned through 180˚
• Sure 6-point fixture with 2 keyholes arranged in the centre • Assembly of devces up to 63A
• Optimised pipe and trunking entries • Ingress protection IP30 (without door), IP40 (with door)
• More wiring space between the modular devices and terminals
• Isolation class II, double insulation
as well as behind the DIN rails
• Clean and convenient wiring thanks to patented integrated • Impact resistance IK07
cable management system
• Unbreakable door hinges
• Same door for VS surface-mounted version and VF flush
mounted version
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 23
Expert
tips
1 5
Convenient cable Easily-accessible DIN rail
management mounting saves time and
Clean and easy wiring thanks to effort
patented, integrated fixation for DIN rail can be swiftly mounted-
5 cable clips and cable ties. ed using the keyhole on the

side. The screwed fixture is out-
side the modular device area
providing easy access.
2 6
Snap-in PE/N terminal Vertical and horizontal
strips connecting of the
Quick Connect or brass terminal enclosures
strips can be easily mounted by Connecting pieces permits safe,
simply snapping into the wall vertical and horizontal connec-
sleeve. tion of the enclosures.
3 7
Self-explanatory graphics Swift and safe cover fix-
in the wall box ing with 1/4 turn
All product features are Position the cover and turn the
explained by integrated graphics screw through 90˚.
in the wall box. Quick-fixing screws can not get
lost.
4 8
More space for wiring Unbreakable door hinges
Easier wiring of the installed Defective hinges are now a thing
modular devices guaranteed by of the past. Same door for
larger wiring space between the suface-mounted and flush-
devices and PE/N terminals. mounted distributors.
More space behind the DIN rails Symmetrical door installation;
facilitates installation of insulated door hinges can be mounted on
wires. left or right.
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 24
golf flush mounted enclosures

VF series
Flush mounted distribution boxes Door can be fitted on right or left Components included
from 1 to 4 rows, from 4 to 72 ❚ without dismounting the cover; - Brass screw-type terminals
Supplied with: optional lock and keys. - Marking stickers
- opaque or transparent door for - Towers to fix cable ties for
devices up to 70mm installation Door opens up to 180˚. Wall box clear cable management are
depth and cover can be installed either included, cable-retaining clips
- DIN profile for modular devices way up. are optional
47mm under the cover. (except in 4 and 8 enclosures.)
- Removable cable entry slider. - Carton packaging
Distance between the DIN rails - Cable entries for cable and - DIN rails directly fixed to the
axis 125mm. conduit. wall box allow room for wiring
behind them.
Distribution boards manufactured
from plastic material. IEC 60 439-3
IEC 60 695-2-1/0
and 60 695-2-1/1
Designation Type of Pack Cat. Ref.

wall recess door qty.
1 row, 4 ❚ N : 2 x 16mm2 + 2 x 10mm2 Opaque 1 VF104PM

w.170 x h.189 x d.72 E : 2 x 16mm2 + 2 x 10mm2
Transparent 1 VF104TM
2+
1
/
2

VF108PM
w.242 x h.189 x d.72 E : 2 x 16mm2 + 4 x 10mm2
2+
1
/
2
1 row, 12 ❚ N : 4 x 16mm2 + 6 x 10mm2 Opauque 1 VF112PM

w.318 x h.257 x d.72 E : 4 x 16mm2 + 6 x 10mm2
2+
1
/
2
2 rows, 24 ❚ N : (5 x 16mm2 + 6 x 10mm2) x 2 Opaque 1 VF212PM

VF212PM
w.318 x h.382 x d.72 E : 9 x 16mm2 + 13 x 10mm2
4+2
1
/
2
3 rows, 36 ❚ N : (1 x 25mm2 + 7 x 16mm2 + 8 x 10mm2) x 2 Opaque 1 VF312PM

w.318 x h.507 x d.72 E : 1 x 25mm2 + 14 x 16mm2 + 17 x 10mm2
3x2+
1
/
2
4 rows, 48 ❚ N : (1 x 25mm2 + 6 x 16mm2 + 7 x 10mm2) x 3 Opaque 1 VF412PM

VF312PM w.318 x h.652 x d.72 E : (1 x 25mm2 + 10 x 16mm2 + 13 x 10mm2)
+ (9 x 16mm2 + 11 x 10mm2) Transparent 1 VF412TM
4x2+
1
/
2
A.11
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 25
golf flush mounted encloures

VF series
Technical data - Isolation Class II Certification according to

- IP rating: - White colour RAL 9010 IEC 60 439-3
IP30 without door - Rated current:
IP40 with door for devices up to 63A All products conform to the
IK07 - Rated insulation: RoHS and WEEE directives.
400V a.c. /50Hz
IEC 60 439-3
IEC 60 695-2-1/0
and 60 695-2-1/1

wall recess door qty.

w.426 x h.257 x d.72 E : 7 x 16mm2 + 9 x 10mm2
2+
1
/
2
VF218PM
2 row, 36 ❚ N: (1 x 25 mm2 + 7 x 16 mm2 Opaque 1 VF218PM

w.426 x h.382 x d.72 + 8 x 10 mm2) x 2
E: 1 x 25 mm2 + 14 x 16 mm2 Transparent 1 VF218TM
+ 17 x 10 mm2
2x2+
1
/
2
3 row, 54 ❚ N: (1 x 25 mm2 + 7 x 16 mm2 Opaque 1 VF318PM

VF318PM w.426 x h.507 x d.72 + 8 x 10 mm2) x 2+ (7 x 16 mm2
+ 9 x 10 mm2)
E: (1 x 25 mm2 + 14 x 16 mm2 Transparent 1 VF318TM
+ 17 x 10 mm2) +
(7 x 16 mm2 + 9 x 10 mm2)
3x2+
1
/
2
4 rows, 72 ❚ N: (1 x 25 mm2 + 7 x 16 mm2 Opaque 1 VF418PM

w.426 x h.652 x d.72 + 8 x 10 mm2) x 4
E: (1 x 25 mm2 + 14 x 16 mm2 Transparent 1 VF418TM
+ 17 x 10 mm2) x 2
VF418PM
3x2+
1
/
2
1 rows, 22 ❚ N: 8 x 16 mm2 + 10 x 10 mm2 Opaque 1 VF122PM

w.498 x h.257 x d.72 E: 8 x 16 mm2 + 10 x 10 mm2
2+
1
/
2
A.12
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 26
golf surface mounted enclosures

VS series
Surface mounted distribution Distribution boards manufactured Components included

box from 1 to 4 rows, from 4 to from plastic material. - brass screw-type terminals
72 ❚ Door can be fitted on right or left - directly fixed DIN rails to the
Supplied with: without dismounting the cover, wall box let to have room
- opaque or transparent door for optional lock with keys. enough for wiring behind them.
devices up to 70mm Door opens up to 180˚. - marking stickers
installation depth. - towers to fix cable ties for clear
- DIN profile for modular devices Enclosure can be installed either cable management are included,
47mm under the cover. way up. cable-retaining clips are optional
Cable entries for cable, conduit (except in 4 and 8 enclosures.)
Distance between the DIN and trucking. - door protected by a plastic film.
profiles axis 125mm. - carton packaging
IEC 60 439-3
IEC 60 695-2-1/0
and 60 695-2-1/1

door qty.
1 row, 4 ❚ N : 2 x 16mm2 + 2 x 10mm2 Opaque 1 VS104PM

w.138 x h.184 x d.99 E : 2 x 16mm2 + 2 x 10mm2
1
Transparent 1 VS104TM
2+ /
2
VS108PM 1 row, 8 ❚ N : 2 x 16mm2 + 4 x 10mm2 Opaque 1 VS108PM

w.210 x h.184 x d.99 E : 2 x 16mm2 + 4 x 10mm2

1
2+ /
2
1 row, 12❚ N : 4 x 16mm2 + 6 x 10mm2 Opaque 1 VS112PM

w.282 x h.252 x d.99 E : 4 x 16mm2 + 6 x 10mm2
VS212PM
2+
1
/
2
2 rows, 24 ❚ N : (5 x 16mm2 + 6 x 10mm2) x 2 Opaque 1 VS212PM

w.282 x h.377 x d.99 E : 9 x 16mm2 + 13 x 10mm2
2x2+2
1
/
2
3 rows, 36 ❚ N : (1 x 25mm2 + 7 x 16mm2 + 8 x 10mm2) x 2 Opaque 1 VS312PM

w.282 x h.500 x d.99 E : 1 x 25mm2 + 14 x 16mm2 + 17 x 10mm2
3x2+
1
/
2
VS412PM
4 rows, 48 ❚ N : (1 x 25mm2 + 6 x 16mm2 + 7 x 10mm2) x 3 Opaque 1 VS412PM
w.282 x h.647 x d.99 E : (1 x 25mm2 + 10 x 16mm2 + 13 x 10mm2)
+ (9 x 16mm2 + 11 x 10mm2) Transparent 1 VS412TM
4x2+
1
/
2
A.13
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 27
golf surface mounted enclosures

VS series
Technical data - Isulation Class II Certification according to

- IP rating: - White colour RAL 9010 IEC 60 439-3
IP30 without door - Rated current:
IP40 with door for devices up to 63A All products conform to the
IK07 - Rated insulation: RoHS and WEEE directives.
400V a.c. /50Hz
IEC 60 439-3
IEC 60 695-2-1/0
and 60 695-2-1/1

door qty.
1 row, 18 ❚ N : 7 x 16mm2 + 9 x 10mm2 Opaque 1 VS118PM

w.390 x h257 x d.99 E : 7 x 16mm2 + 9 x 10mm2 Transparent 1 VS118TM
2+
1
/
2
2 row, 36 ❚ N: (1 x 25 mm2 + 7 x 16 mm2 + 8 x 10 mm2) x 2 Opaque 1 VS218PM

w.390 x h.377 x d.99 E: 1 x 25 mm2 + 14 x 16 mm2 + 17 x 10 mm2 Transparent 1 VS218TM

VS218PM 1
2x2+ /
2
3 row, 54 ❚ N: (1 x 25 mm2 + 7 x 16 mm2 + 8 x 10 mm2) x 2 Opaque 1 VS318PM

w.390 x h.500 x d.99 + (7 x 16 mm2 + 9 x 10 mm2)
E: (1 x 25 mm2 + 14 x 16 mm2 + 17 x 10 mm2) Transparent 1 VS318TM
+ (7 x 16 mm2 + 9 x 10 mm2)
3x2+
1
/
2
VS318PM 4 rows, 72 ❚ N: (1 x 25 mm2 + 7 x 16mm2 + 8 x 10mm2) x 4 Opaque 1 VS418PM

w.390 x h.647 x d.99 E: (1 x 25 mm2 + 14 x 16mm2 + 17 x 10 mm2) x 2

1
4x2+ /
2
1 rows, 22 ❚ N: 8 x 16 mm2 + 10 x 10 mm2 Opaque 1 VS122PM

w.462 x h.252 x d.99 E: 8 x 16 mm2 + 10 x 10 mm2

1
2+ /
2
VS418PM
A.14
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 28
golf flush mounted enclosures

VF series
Cable entries
Top/bottom Side
One side cable entry slide, knockout-type, (VF104... and VF108... Each one knockout Ø 25 mm on the left and right in the upper and
- NO slider). lower connection space.
The other side pre cuts with diameters 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm and
40 mm the wall box is 180º turnable (slider can be placed at top or As of 2 rows, knockouts Ø 25 mm on the left and right between the
bottom). device rows. (no knockouts at 4 and 8 module enclosures).
Reference Dimension (mm)

Frame Wall niche
A H E F
VF104... 1 row 4 ❚ 204 225 170 189
VF108... 2 row 8 ❚ 275 225 242 189
VF112... 1 row 12 ❚ 352 293 318 257
VF212... 2 row 12 ❚ 352 418 318 382
VF312... 3 row 12 ❚ 352 543 318 507
VF412... 4 row 12 ❚ 352 688 318 652
VF118... 1 row 18 ❚ 460 293 426 257
VF218... 2 row 18 ❚ 460 418 426 382
VF318... 3 row 18 ❚ 460 543 426 507
VF418... 4 row 18 ❚ 460 688 426 652
VF122... 1 row 22 ❚ 532 293 498 257
For the wall niche, these dimensions are minimal.
For hollow wall,

the cavity wall section should be:
Ref. E F
VF104... 170 189
VF108... 242 189
VF112... 318 257
VF212... 318 382
VF312... 318 507
F
VF412... 318 652

VF118... 426 257
VF218... 426 382
VF318... 426 507
VF418... 426 652
VF122... 498 257
Depth must always be 72 mm min.

E
6
A.15
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 29
golf surface mounted enclosure

VS series
Cable entries
Top/bottom
One side cable entry optimised for use of trunking, knockout-type.
The other side pre cuts with diameters 20 mm, 25 mm,
32 mm and 40 mm the wall box is 180º turnable.
E Reference Dimension Wall fixation

A H E F G
VS104... 1 row 4 ❚ 137.5 183.5 101 68 58
G
VS108... 2 row 8 ❚ 209.5 183.5 173.5 68 58

VS112... 1 row 12 ❚ 281.5 251.5 221.5 135.5 58
VS212... 2 row 12 ❚ 281.5 376.5 221.5 260.5 58
VS312... 3 row 12 ❚ 281.5 500 221.5 385.5 58
VS412... 4 row 12 ❚ 281.5 646.5 221.5 491 78
F
VS118... 1 row 18 ❚ 389.5 251.5 329.5 135.5 58

VS218... 2 row 18 ❚ 389.5 376.5 329.5 260.5 58
VS318... 3 row 18 ❚ 389.5 500 329.5 385.5 58
VS418... 4 row 18 ❚ 389.5 646.5 329.5 491 78
VS122... 1 row 22 ❚ 461.5 251.5 401.5 135.5 58
A.16
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 30
vega enclosures
IP40 surface mounting The enclosures feature a The door is also reversible with
enclosures with transparent or removable chassis with DIN rails an integral flush handle.
plain doors; 1-4 rows 18 to 72 ❚ for ease of installation. Options
Enclosures are of an insulating - Door lock
material coloured white Top and bottom cable entry - Cable trunking
RAL 9010. plates are removable and
Insulation Class II interchangeable. IEC 60695-2-1/0
IEC 60695-2-1/1
IP30 IK 07 without door
IP40 IK 08 with door These enclosures are delivered
with brass terminal and supports
for neutral and earth connection.
Designation Pack Cat. Ref

qty.
Surface enclosures
1 row 18 ❚ E: 2x(1x25 + 5x16 + 5x10mm2) 21/2

w.370 x h.300 x d.145 N: 2x(1x25 + 5x16 + 5x10mm2)
With transparent door 1 VB18W

With plain door 1 VB18J
2 rows 36 ❚ E: 2x(1x25 + 7x16 + 9x10mm2) 42/2

w.370 x h.450 x d.145 N: 2x(1x25 + 7x16 + 9x10mm2)
VB18W VB18J With transparent door 1 VB36W

3 rows 54 ❚ E: 2x(1x25 + 11x16 + 13x10mm2) 21/2

w.370 x h.600 x d.145 N: 2x(1x25 + 11x16 + 13x10mm2)
With transparent door 1 VB54W

4 rows 72 ❚ E: 2x(1x25 + 11x16 + 13x10mm2) + 21/2

w.370 x h.750 x d.145 1x(1x25+5x16+5x10mm2)
N: 2x(1x25 + 11x16 + 13x10mm2) +
1x(1x25+5x16+5x10mm2)
VB54W VB54J With transparent door 1 VB72W
With plain door 1 V72J
Key lock Supplied with 2 keys 1 VZ310

VZ310
A.17
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 31
vega dimensions
VB 36 - 2 rows 36 ❚ Reference Dimension

A 145 A B E F G
VB18J 18 ❚ 370 300 300 236 32
150 150
VB18W 18 ❚ 370 300 300 236 32
VB36J 36 ❚ 370 450 300 386 32
VB36W 36 ❚ 370 450 300 386 32
B
VB54J 54 ❚ 370 600 300 536 32

VB54W 54 ❚ 370 600 300 536 32
VB72J 72 ❚ 370 750 300 686 32
VB72W 72 ❚ 370 750 300 686 32
G
Measurement scale for fixing centres Insulation cap for screw heads
Cable tie facility Conduit entry
Cable tie plates for conduit and trunking
A.18
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 32
New generation
volta flush enclosures
For installation under plaster and in hollow wall mounting
When building or renovating residential buildings, compact solutions are often required for electrical
and multimedia installations.
The volta small distribution board is especially suitable thanks to its easy assembly in walls as well as
its manifold versions with 30% larger wiring space by lateral wiring trunking and larger upper and lower
connection areas.
Your benefits Technical data :

• Protection against power theft-the screws can be sealed • From 1 to 4 rows.
• High degree of safety-the door lock can be retrofitted without • From 12 to 48 modules.
requiring any additional conversions.
• Large selection of design variants • IP30
• Installation even in thin walls • Protection class II, totally insulated
• 30% more wiring space
• Power distributor
• Shorter mounting time
• Swift mounting in cavity walls

2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 33
Expert
tips
1 5
Larger upper and lower By pressing in the screw
connection areas in the cavity wall anchor
Offering more space for termi- The levers swivel outwards and
nals and wiring. click into place. The wall sleeve
5 is fixed into place.
2 6
All wall sleeves availabe The slides are removed
at separate side areas Before cables are entered.
For cable management and Pre-punched segments on the
retaining clamps. side facilitate knockouts.
3 7
Retaining clamps New quick connection
In the door for circuit tables and for the cover
plans. Simply turn to secure or release.
4 8
A miniature spirit level Flat version
Is integrated in all wall sleeves Any standard version with 90
as an installation aid. It can be mm installation depth can be
used for aligning. converted into a “flat version”
with 72 mm installation depth
using the raising frame.
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 34
Flush mounting enclosures with Delivered with earth bar,

doors blanking clips and circuit
1-4 rows, 12-48 ❚ identification labelling.
Enclosures manufactured from
insulated material.
Frame and door manufactured
from metal.
Reversible door
Colour white RAL 9016

qty.
1 row, 12 ❚ E : 13x10mm2 2 +1/2 1 VU12NSG

Wall recess N : 13x10mm2
w.330 x h.317 x d.89
Outside
w.348 x h.336 x d.9
2 rows, 24 ❚ E : 5x16 + 20x10mm2 4 + 2/2 1 VU24NSG

Wall recess N : 5x16 + 20x10mm2
VU12NSG VU24NSG w.330 x h.442 x d.89
Outside
w.348 x h.461 x d.9
3 rows, 36 ❚ E : 2x(8x16 + 9x10mm2) 6 + 3/2 1 VU36NSG

Wall recess N : 2x(8x16 + 9x10mm2)
w.330 x h.567 x d.89
Outside
w.348 x h.586 x d.9
4 rows, 48 ❚ E : 2x(8x16 + 9x10mm2) +

Wall recess (6x16mm2 + 7x10mm2)
w.330 x h.692 x d.89 N : 2x(8x16 + 9x10mm2) +
(6x16mm2 + 7x10mm2) 8 + 4/2 1 VU48NSG

VU48NSG Outside
w.348 x h.711 x d.9
VU36NSG
Key lock Supplied with 2 keys 1 VZ302N

Mounting kit for For mounting flush enclosures 1 Kit VZ405N

partition walls in partition walls
VZ302N
comprising 4
support clamps
4 screws
A.21
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 35
VU 24NSG
Enclosure Outside Inside
volta
R A B E F
VU12NSG 12 ❚ 348 356 300 315 322
VU24NSG 24 ❚ 348 505 300 315 471
VU36NSG 36 ❚ 348 630 300 315 596
VU48NSG 48 ❚ 348 755 300 315 721
Wall mounting bracket Connecting two enclosures
Conduit entry Cable entry plate
Connection assembly Mounting of lock and key
A.22
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 36
IP65 enclosures
orion plus
One system for indoor and outdoor application
Sheet steel or glass reinforced polyester - the orion plus enclosures are suited for harshest conditions
and can be applied for wet and mechanical use. Even under chemical use, orion plus offers the ideal
solution with glass reinforced polyester.
The interior equipment can be realized flexibly via mounting plate or DIN rail (in 2 different versions)
and thus offers the suitable interior equipment system - both for the application in automation and for
classical current distribution.
Your benefits Technical data :

• High protection class (IP65/K10) and nice design. • IP 65 door closed, RAL 7035
• Size and depth adapted according to your need. • Sheet steel - class I or polyester - class II
• Height: 300 to 1250mm.
• Height (polyester enclosures): 1200 to 2050mm.
• Depth: 160 to 300mm.

2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 37
Expert
tips
1 4
Front plates adjustable in Reversible door
depth Doors can be mounted on the
Thanks to slides. right side or on the left side.
2 5
Modular kits on pillars Easy mounting and cabling
Screws integrated in the pillars Modular devices are mounted on
for fast mounting in the enclosure. the chassis, outside or inside the
enclosure.
3 6
Easy fixing Association
Fast fixing screws to fix the Metal enclosures can be fixed
plates. on a base or vertically associat-
ed using a seal kit.
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 38
orion plus metal IP65 enclosures
Enclosures with plain or These enclosures feature : Options :

transparent door - 2 removable gland plate for - Key lock
Steel colour RAL 7035 cable entry on top and - Wall fixing brackets
bottom - Plain or perforated mounting
IP 65 / door closed - Earth studs on both body and plate
Insulation class : I 얗 door - Equipment kits for modular
according to IEC 60529 - Door easily removable devices
1,5mm thick sheet steel for - Plain door equipped with one
body and door or two locks with triangular
8mm bit centres, located out
of the sealed area.
Designation Characteristics No. of Cat. Ref. Cat. Ref.

locks plain transpar.
door door
orion plus metal enclosures Dimensions :
h.300 x w.250 x d.160 1 FL102A FL152A
h.350 x w.300 x d.160 1 FL104A FL154A
h.350 x w.300 x d.200 1 FL105A FL155A
h.500 x w.300 x d.200 1 FL110A FL160A
h.500 x w.400 x d.200 1 FL112A FL162A
FL110A h.650 x w.400 x d.200 2 FL117A FL167A
h.650 x w.400 x d.250 2 FL118A FL168A
h.650 x w.500 x d.200 2 FL119A FL169A
h.650 x w.500 x d.250 2 FL120A FL170A
h.800 x w.500 x d.250 2 FL122A FL172A
h.800 x w.600 x d.250 2 FL123A FL173A
h.800 x w.600 x d.300 2 FL124A FL174A
h.950 x w.600 x d.250 2 FL125A FL175A
h.950 x w.600 x d.300 2 FL126A FL176A
h.950 x w.800 x d.250 2 FL127A FL177A
h.950 x w.800 x d.300 2 FL128A FL178A
h.1250 x w.800 x d.300 2 FL130A FL180A
Plinth For enclosure :

height 50 mm FL119A 500 x 200 1 FL957A
FL120A 500 x 250 1 FL958A
FL123A 600 x 250 1 FL959A
FL958A FL126A 600 x 300 1 FL960A
FL127A 800 x 250 1 FL961A
FL128A, FL130A 800 x 300 1 FL962A
A.25
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 39
orion plus GRP IP65 enclosure

Designation Characteristics Cat. Ref.
Key lock Key lock to be mounted FL96Z

on the triangular lock
Replace the triangular locks 1 set of 2 key locks with FL80Z

of origin male square 8mm, with 1 key
FL96Z
1 set of 2 locks double-bars FL95Z
3mm, with 1 key
Wall fixing brackets Metallic wall fixing FL85Z

FL80Z FL95Z Metal brackets with screws
set of 4 pieces
FL85Z
Kit for connection to earth For metal enclosures FL874A
FL874A
Vertical connection kit FL670A
FL670A
A.26
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 40
orion plus GRP IP65 enclosure
Enclosure with plain or - Studs in the back of the

transparent door enclosure for mounting plate
Made of glass reinforced poly- fastening
ester (GRP)
Colour : RAL 7035
Options :
Body made out of one piece up - Key lock
to height 800mm - Wall fixing brackets
- Plain or perforated mounting
IP 65 / door closed IEC60529 plate
insulation class : II 쏾 - Equipment kits for modular
according to IEC 61140 devices
These enclosures feature :

- Plain door equipped with one
or two locks with triangular
8mm centres, located out of
FL216B the sealed area, gasket
directly moulded on the door.
Designation Characteristics No of Cat. Ref. Cat. Ref.

locks plain tranpar.
door door
orion plus GRP enclosures Dimensions: Heights:
top and
bottom
parts
h.350 x w.300 x d.160 1 FL204B FL254B
h.500 x w.300 x d.200 2 FL209B FL259B
h.500 x w.400 x d.200 2 FL213B FL263B
h.650 x w.400 x d.200 2 FL216B FL266B
h.650 x w.500 x d.250 2 FL221B FL271B
h.800 x w.600 x d.300 2 FL229B FL279B
h.1150 x w.600 x d.300 1 FL302B FL502B
FL216B h.1200 x w.850 x d.300 1 FL327B FL527B
h.1450 x w.850 x d.300* 550/850 2 FL352B

* Enclosure with 2 superposed
doors and a plinth height h.1750 x w.850 x d.300* 550/1150 2 FL354B
70mm
h.2050 x w.1100 x d.300* 850/1150 2 FL368B
Locks Key locks for enclosures FL96Z

FL92Z
to be mounted on the h 800
triangular lock, supplied with
2 keys n° 427 for enclosures FL98Z
h 1150
FL81Z FL97Z Replacement of triangular lock 1 set of 2 locks with male FL81Z
of origin square 8mm with 1 key
1 set of 2 locks double-bars FL97Z

3mm with 1 key
Plastic wall fixing brackets Delivered with fixing screws FL863Z

M6x12 on enclosure set
of 4 pieces
FL863Z
A.27
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 41
accessories
for orion plus enclosures
Designation Characteristics Dimensions Cat. Ref.

L x H (mm)
Plain mounting plates For enclosure :

FL102A, FL152A L.193 x H.280 FL402A
Steel sheet 2mm thickness, FL104A, FL105A, FL204B L.243 x H.330 FL404A
aluminium zinc FL154A, FL155A, FL254B
FL110A, FL209B L.243 x H.480 FL407A
Assembly of the plates : FL160A, FL259B
- Fixed directly on the back of FL112A, FL213B L.343 x H.480 FL408A
the enclosure FL162A, FL263B
- Or on slides allowing the FL117A, FL118A, FL216B L.343 x H.630 FL412A
indepth setting FL167A, FL168A, FL266B
(fixing with slides FL450A) FL119A, FL120A, FL221B L.443 x H.630 FL413A
FL169A, FL170A, FL271B
FL123A, FL124A, FL229B L.543 x H.780 FL415A
FL125A, FL126A L.543 x H.930 FL416A
FL408A FL175A, FL176A
FL127A, FL128A L.743 x H.930 FL417A
FL177A, FL178A
FL130A, FL180A L.743 x H.1230 FL419A
FL302B, FL502B L.493 x H.1080 FL512E
FL327B, FL527B L.693 x H.1080 FL522E
FL352B L.693 x H.480 FL520E

(upper plate)
L.693 x H.780 FL521E
(bottom plate)
FL 354B L.693 x H.480 FL520E
(upper plate)
L.693 x H.1080 FL522E
(bottom plate)
FL 368B L.993 x H.780 FL531E
(upper plate)
L.993 x H.1080 FL532E
(bottom plate)
For enclosure :
Perforated mounting plate FL102A, FL152A 193 x 280 FL472A
FL201B
Steel sheet 2mm thickness FL104A, FL105A, FL204B 243 x 330 FL473A
Assembly of the plates : 243 x 480 FL474A
FL110A, FL209B
- Fixed directly on the back of
the enclosure FL160A, FL259B
343 x 480 FL475A
- Or on slides allowing the FL112A, FL213B
indepth setting FL162A, FL263B FL476A
343 x 630
(fixing with slides FL450A) FL117A, FL118A, FL216B
FL167A, FL168A, FL266B 443 x 630 FL477A
FL169A, FL170A, FL271B 543 x 780 FL479A
FL173A, FL174A, FL279B 543 x 930 FL480A
FL475A
FL125A, FL126A
743 x 930 FL481A
FL175A, FL176A
FL127A, FL128A FL483A
743 x 1230
FL177A, FL178A
FL130A, FL180A
Adjustment slides 4 slides delivered with screws FL450A

For assembly of the plates on
depth
FL450A
Nut-clips and screw M5 1 set = 25 nuts UC969

For perforated mounting plate
UC969
A.28
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 42
accessories
Designation Characteristics Pack Cat. Ref.
qty
Cable trunking Width x depth Length. 2 x 2m 2 FL70Z

Horizontal and vertical 25 x 60 mm
40 x 60 mm Length. 2 x 2m 2 FL71Z
FL70Z
Wire guides Large wire guide 20 UZ25V1

To be fixed on the rail with
support UZ 01V1 by simple
rotation Small wire guide 20 UZ25V2
UZ25V1 Supports for fixing Clip fixing 20 UZ01V1

For wire guides
Blanking strip Separable by 1/2 length. 4 20 FL871Z

To blank a row
(e.g. for terminals) on a front
UZ25V2 plate for modular devices
(kit is composed of 6 pieces
per4 modules)
Marking strip Includes : length. 24 12 JE003

For front plates - Adhesive transparent
label holders
- Marking labels
Setting slides For enclosure : 5 FL672E

In-depth of mounting plates FL 302B, FL 327B, FL 352B,
FL672E FL 354B, FL 368B
Painting aerosol can Colour RAL 7035 1 FL672Z

For the touch-up of the Orion
Plus enclosures
FZ672Z
A.29
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 43
accessories
Equipment kits
For modular devices
For enclosures :
- On chassis FL104A, FL105A, FL204B 2 rows (24) FL980A
only FL 980A and FL 981A FL154A, FL155A, FL254B
Composed of FL110A, FL209B 3 rows (36) FL981A

- Rails DIN (slide length FL160A, FL259B
44 mm) assembled on chassis
and adjustable in depth
(of front plates with slide)
FL981A
- On vertical rail FL112A, FL213B 3 rows (48) FL992A

Composed of FL162A, FL263B
- 2 vertical rail, DIN rail
(slide length 44 mm) FL117A, FL118A, FL216B 4 rows (64) FL993A
- Front plates with slit FL167A, FL168A, FL266B
- A cross-rail authorizing the
assembly of bars on base and FL119A, FL120A, FL221B 4 rows (88) FL994A
slides FL169A, FL170A, FL271B
FL123A, FL124A, FL229B 5 rows (130) FL996A

FL125A, FL126A 6 rows (156) FL997A

FL175A, FL176A
FL127A, FL128A 6 rows (222) FL998A

FL177A, FL178A
Adjustable DIN rails For enclosures : length :

In depth for terminal blocks
tilting 30° FL112A, FL117A, FL118A, 400 mm FL500A
FL213B, FL216B, FL162A
FL167A, FL168A, FL263A, FL266B
For equipment kits with vertical FL119A, FL120A, FL221B, FL169A, 500 mm FL501A
rails FL170A, FL271B
FL123A, FL124A, FL125A, 600 mm FL502E

FL126A, FL129A, FL229B,
FL173A, FL174A, FL175A,
FL127A, FL128A, FL130A 800 mm FL503E

FL177A, FL178A, FL180A
Plain front plates For enclosures :

For equipment kits
For modular devices, FL104A, FL105A, FL110A, 300 mm VP03Z
FL154A, FL155A, FL160A
FL204B, FL254B
Replacement of the front plates FL112A, FL117A, FL118A, 400 mm FL712E

FL712E with slits of origin FL162A, FL167A, FL168A,
FL213B, FL216B, FL263B, FL266B
Height : 150 mm FL119A, FL120A, FL221B 500 mm FL713E

FL123A, FL124A, FL125A, 600 mm FL714E

FL126A, FL129A, FL173A, FL174A,
FL175A, FL179A, FL176A, FL279B,
FL229B
FL127A, FL128A, FL130A, FL177A, 800 mm FL715E

FL178A, FL180A
A.30
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 44
orion plus-metal enclosures IP65
Dimensions
References Rows Enclosure Outside fixing Inside fixing
A H B B1 B2 C D E1 E2 F1 F2 E F
FL102A - 250 300 160 195 80 200 250 210 320 220 332 169 208
FL104A 2 300 350 160 245 80 250 300 260 370 272 382 219 258
FL105A 2 300 350 200 245 120 250 300 260 370 272 382 219 258
FL110A 3 300 500 200 245 120 250 450 260 370 422 532 219 408
FL112A 3 400 500 200 345 120 350 450 360 470 422 532 319 408
FL117A 4 400 650 200 345 120 350 600 360 470 572 682 319 558
FL118A 4 400 650 250 345 170 350 600 360 470 572 682 319 558
FL119A 4 500 650 200 445 120 450 600 460 570 572 682 419 558
FL120A 4 500 650 250 445 170 450 600 460 570 572 682 419 558
FL122A - 500 800 250 - - - - - - - - - -
FL123A 5 600 800 250 545 170 550 750 560 670 722 832 519 708
FL124A 5 600 800 300 545 220 550 750 560 670 722 832 519 708
FL125A 6 600 950 250 545 170 550 900 560 670 872 982 519 858
FL126A 6 600 950 300 545 220 550 900 560 670 872 982 519 858
FL127A 6 800 950 250 745 170 750 900 760 870 872 982 719 858
FL128A 6 800 950 300 745 220 750 900 760 870 870 982 719 858
FL130A - 800 1250 300 745 220 750 1200 760 870 1172 1282 719 858
B2
B1
A B A1
22 E3
F1
F2
H1
F3
F
H
E1
16
E note : foresee ’’A + 25 mm’’ to open the door
E2
A.31
2012_SEA_A01-32_2012_SEA_A 31/8/12 11:28 AM Page 45
orion plus-GRP enclosures IP65
Dimensions of mounting plates
Full plates Perforated plates For enclosures Dimension plates Plates fixing
A1 H1 E3 F3
FL402A FL472A FL102A 193 280 169 208
FL404A FL473A FL104A, FL105A, FK204B 243 330 219 258
FL407A FL474A FL110A, FL209B 243 480 219 258
FL408A FL475A FL112A, FL213B 343 480 219 408
FL412A FL476A FL117A, FL118A, FL216B 343 630 319 408
FL413A FL477A FL120A, FL221B 443 630 319 558
FL415A FL479A FL123A, FL124A, FL229B 543 780 319 558
FL416A FL480A FL125A, FL126A 543 930 419 558
FL417A FL481A FL127A, FL128A 743 930 419 558
FL419A FL483A FL130A 743 1230 519 708
FL512E FL302B 493 1080 519 708
FL520E FL352B, FL354B 693 480 519 858
FL521E FL352B 693 780 519 858
FL522E FL327B, FL354B 693 1080 719 858
FL531E FL368B 993 780 719 858
FL532E FL368B 993 1080 719 1158
GRP enclosures orion plus

A
235
D1
A B
H
F1
H1
F2
H
D
D
C C
E
E1 note : foresee ’’A + 25 mm’’
E2
to open the door
Reference Rows Enclosure Inside fixing Outside fixing

A H H1 B C D D1 E F E1 E2 F1 F2
FL204B 2 300 350 - 160 250 300 - 219 258 339 339 269 389
FL209B 3 300 500 - 200 250 450 - 219 408 339 339 419 539
FL213B 3 400 500 - 200 350 450 - 319 408 439 439 419 539
FL216B 4 400 650 - 200 350 600 - 319 558 439 439 569 689
FL221B 4 500 650 - 250 450 600 - 419 558 539 539 569 689
FL229B 5 600 800 - 300 550 750 - 519 708 639 639 719 839
FL302B - 600 1150 - 300 500 1050 - - - - - - -
FL327B - 850 1200 - 300 750 1050 - - - - - - -
FL352B - 850 1450 810 300 750 750 510 - - - - - -
FL354B - 850 1750 1100 300 750 1050 510 - - - - - -
FL368B - 1100 2050 1110 300 1000 1050 510 - - - - - -
A.32
2012_SEA_B01-06_2012_SEA_B01-6 31/8/12 11:26 AM Page 46
Connection
up to 250A
Insulated busbars, junction blocks, distribution blocks, terminals, all that is needed to quickly and
efficiently mount devices in enclosures and distribution boards.
2012_SEA_B01-06_2012_SEA_B01-6 31/8/12 11:26 AM Page 47
insulated busbars - prong B2
insulated busbars - fork B3
connection blocks B4
brass terminals B5
2012_SEA_B01-06_2012_SEA_B01-6 31/8/12 11:26 AM Page 48
insulated busbars
prong
Designation Section (mm2) In Width Pack Cat. Ref.
module qty.
1 pole, 1 ❚ step
Brown insulation (phase) 10 63A 13 ❚ 50 KB163P
KB163P
Blue insulation (neutral) 10 63A 13 ❚ 50 KB163N
Insulated 10 63A 13 ❚ 10 KB163B
Without insulation 10 63A 13 ❚ 50 KB163I
Insulated 20 100A 57 ❚ 10 KB190B
KB163N 20 100A 24 ❚ 10 KB190C
2 pole, 1 ❚ step
Insulated 10 63A 12 ❚ 10 KB263A
10 63A 24 ❚ 10 KB263C
KB263C
16 80A 56 ❚ 10 KB280B
3 pole, 1 ❚ step
KB363C Insulated 10 63A 12 ❚ 10 KB363A
10 63A 57 ❚ 20 KB363B
10 63A 24 ❚ 10 KB363C
16 80A 57 ❚ 10 KB380B
KB463C
4 pole, 1 ❚ step
Insulated 10 63A 12 ❚ 10 KB463A
10 63A 24 ❚ 10 KB463C
16 80A 56 ❚ 10 KB480B
Cable connectors
Connection from top In 63A for cables : 25mm2 10 KF81A
KF81A KF82A
for cables : 2 x 16mm2 10 KF82A
Connection from side In 63A for cables : 25mm2 10 KF83A
Connection from back In 63A for cables : 50mm2 10 KF50S
KF83A
End cap cover
For single pole busbars KB063P and KB063N 1 set KZ021
For double pole busbars, 10mm2 1 set KZ022
KZ021 For triple pole busbars, 10 or 16mm2 1 set KZ023A

and double pole busbars 16mm2
For four pole busbars, 10 or 16mm2 1 set KZ024

KZ023A
B.3
2012_SEA_B01-06_2012_SEA_B01-6 31/8/12 11:26 AM Page 49
insulated busbars
fork
Designation Section (mm2) In Width Pack Cat. Ref.
module qty.
1 pole, 1 ❚ step 10 63A 12 ❚ 100 KDN163A
10 63A 57 ❚ 50 KDN163B
16 80A 12 ❚ 100 KDN180A
16 80A 57 ❚ 50 KDN180B
KDN180B
20 100A 57 ❚ 10 KD190B
2 pole, 1 ❚ step 10 63A 12 ❚ 50 KDN263A
10 63A 56 ❚ 20 KDN263B
16 80A 12 ❚ 50 KDN280A
16 80A 56 ❚ 10 KDN280B
3 pole, 1 ❚ step 10 63A 12 ❚ 50 KDN363A
10 63A 57 ❚ 20 KDN363B
16 80A 12 ❚ 50 KDN380A
16 80A 57 ❚ 10 KDN380B
KDN380A
4 pole, 1 ❚ step
Insulated 10 63A 12 ❚ 25 KDN463A
10 63A 56 ❚ 10 KDN463B
16 80A 12 ❚ 25 KDN480A
16 80A 56 ❚ 10 KDN480B
Cable connectors
Connection from side In 63A for cables : 25mm2 10 KF84A
Connection from top In 63A for cables : 25mm2 10 KF81D
KF84A
End cap cover

For one pole busbars, 10 or 16mm2 1 set KZN021
For double or triple pole busbars, 10 or 16mm2 1 set KZN023

KZ023
For four pole busbars, 10 or 16mm2 1 set KZN024
B.4
2012_SEA_B01-06_2012_SEA_B01-6 31/8/12 11:26 AM Page 50
connection blocks
Application : Technical data : Connection blocks include :

Copper connection blocks 16mm2 Connections : One insulated support, brass
to 35mm2. To facilitate incoming Incoming: 2 x 25mm2 or 2 x 35mm2 connection blocks with
cables and split into multiple Outgoing: 16mm2 or 25mm2 removable antishear plates to
smaller cables in distribution Mounting: fixing on DIN rail enable the incoming cables to
boards. be connected without cutting.
Designation Characteristics Width in ❚ Pack Cat. Ref.

17.5mm qty.
Connection blocks 1 pole 2 1/2 20 K018

Connection on each pole
Incoming : 2 x 25mm2 l. 34 x h. 50 x w. 52mm
Outgoing: 4 x 16mm2
2 pole 4 10 K023
l. 64 x h. 50 x w. 52mm
K018
4 pole 7 5 K024
l. 121 x h. 50 x w. 62mm
5 pole 8 1/2 5 K025
l. 150 x h. 50 x w. 62mm
K023
Connection blocks (without cover) 1 pole 2 1/2 10 K037F

Connection :
Incoming: 2 x 35mm2 l. 37x h. 30 x w. 47mm
Outgoing: 4 x 25mm2
B.5
2012_SEA_B01-06_2012_SEA_B01-6 31/8/12 11:26 AM Page 51
brass terminals In ≤ 60A
Description : Technical data : Can be clipped directly on the

Terminals for earth, neutral & Brass terminals with/without DIN rail vertical position or with
phase connections. Earth = green/yellow support KZ 060 rail clip horizontal
Can be fitted with/without Phase = beige support position.
insulated support. Neutral = blue support
Connections : Terminals with support Without support

number + section Pack Neutral Earth Phases Pack Cat. Ref.
qty cat. ref. cat.ref. cat. ref. qty.
2 x 16 + 2 x 10mm2
4 connections 50 - - KM04L 10 K140
length 30mm
KM04L
4 x 16 + 4 x 10mm2
8 connections 20 - - KM08L - -
length 30mm
3 x 16 + 4 x 10mm2
KM08L 7 connections 20 KM07N KM07E KM07L 10 K142
length 49mm
5 x 16 + 5 x 10mm2
10 connections 20 KM10A KM10B KM10C 10 K143
KM07N length 67mm
5 x 16 + 6 x 10mm2
11 connections 20 KM11N KM11E KM11L 10 K144
length 73mm
KM10E
2 x 16 (double drive) + 8 x 10mm2
10 connections 20 KM10N KM10E KM10L 10 K145
length 69mm
KM13N 6 x 16 + 7 x 10mm2
13 connections 20 KM13N KM13E - 10 K148
length 85mm
1 x 25 + 5 x 16 + 5 x 10mm2
11 connections 20 - KM11B - 10 K151
KM11B length 85mm
1 x 25 + 8 x 16 + 8 x 10mm2
17 connections 20 KM17N KM17E - 10 K156
KM25N length 121mm 2 supports 2 supports
1 x 25 + 11 x 16 + 13 x 10mm2
25 connections 20 KM25N KM 25E - 10 K158
length 169mm 2 supports 2 supports
KM25N
1 x 25 + 8 x 16 + 29 x 10mm2 Long length terminals length 242mm 10 K159
(without support)
1 x 25 + 16 x 16 + 61 x 10mm2 Fixing on flat bar length 482mm 10 K160
K151 12 x 2 with supports
(see below)
1 x 25 + 33 x 16 + 129 x 10mm2 length 992mm 10 K162
K151
Supports for K 140 Blue support for neutral 10 KZ012

K159
to K 162 terminals
insulating material Green/yellow support for earth 10 KZ013
M4 x 8 fixing screws
Beige supports for phase 10 KZ014
KZ012
Rail clip Mounting on DIN rail 50 KZ060
for fixing terminals on
DIN rail not for : KM04L, KM08L,
KM10A, KM10B, KM10C,
KM10N, KM10E, KM10L
KZ060
B.6
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 52
Protection devices
the complete solution
Hager offers a wide range of protection devices, such as miniature circuit breakers, auxiliaries and
accessories, RCD add-on blocks, single pole and switched neutral devices, 2 and 4 pole RCCBs,
RCCB auxiliaries, RCBOs, HRC fuse carriers, motor starters, earth leakage relays and surge protection
devices.
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 53
miniature circuit breakers C3
remote control auxiliary C16
auxiliaries and accessories for

MCBs & RCCBs C17
RCD add-on blocks C23
2 & 4 pole residual current devices

(RCCBs/ ELCBs) C26
RCCBs selective product range

type S (delay) C27
RCCB - HI (high immunity) series type A C27
combined MCB/RCD (RCBO) 6kA/ 10kA C28
RCBO electronic C30
earth leakage relays & torroidal

transformers C33
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 54
miniature circuit breakers 4.5kA type C - MY
Description Breaking capacity : Connection capacity :

Protection and control of circuits 4.5kA IEC 60 898 25mm2 rigid conductor
against overloads and short cir- 6kA IEC 60 947-2 16mm2 flexible conductor
cuits in domestic, commercial 10KAIC NEMA AB-1 Will accept accessories, shunt
and industrial applications. Reference calibration trips, auxiliary contact.
Temperature : 30°C see page 12
Technical data Voltage rating : 230/400V
C curve tripping Mechanical endurance : Approval :
Current rating : 1-63A 20 000 operations KEMA
ST, SNI, LMK
Designation In/A Width in ❚ Pack Cat. Ref

17.5mm qty.
Single pole MCB 1 1 12 MY101E

2 1 12 MY102E
1 3 1 12 MY103E
4 1 12 MY104E
2
6 1 12 MY106E
10 1 12 MY110E
16 1 12 MY116E
20 1 12 MY120E
25 1 12 MY125E
32 1 12 MY132E
40 1 12 MY140E
MY106E
50 1 12 MY150E
63 1 12 MY163E
Double pole MCB 1 2 6 MY201E

2 2 6 MY202E
1 3 3 2 6 MY203E
4 2 6 MY204E
2 4
6 2 6 MY206E
10 2 6 MY210E
16 2 6 MY216E
20 2 6 MY220E
25 2 6 MY225E
32 2 6 MY232E
MY232E
40 2 6 MY240E
50 2 6 MY250E
63 2 6 MY263E
Triple pole MCB 1 3 4 MY301E

2 3 4 MY302E
1 3 5
3 3 4 MY303E
4 3 4 MY304E
2 4 6 6 3 4 MY306E
10 3 4 MY310E
16 3 4 MY316E
20 3 4 MY320E
25 3 4 MY325E
32 3 4 MY332E
MY316
40 3 4 MY340E
50 3 4 MY350E
63 3 4 MY363E
C.3
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 55
miniature circuit breakers 6kA type B & C - MT MU
Description Breaking capacity : Connection capacity :

Protection and control of circuits 6kA IEC 60 898 25mm2 rigid conductor
against overloads and short 10kA IEC 60 947-2 16mm2 flexible conductor
circuits in domestic, commercial 22KAIC NEMA AB-1
and industrial applications. Voltage rating : 230/400V Will accept accessories, shunt
Current rating : 2-63A trips, auxiliary contact.
Technical data Mechanical endurance :
MTxxxA = type B tripping 20 000 operations Approval :
MUxxxA = type C tripping KEMA
according to IEC 60 898 and SNI
BSEN 60-898 LMK
Reference calibration
Temperature : 30°C
Designation In/A Width in ❚ Pack Cat. Ref. Cat. Ref.

17.5mm qty. B curve C curve
Single pole MCB 2 1 12 - MU102A

1
4 1 12 - MU104A
6 1 12 MT106A MU106A
10 1 12 MT110A MU110A
2
16 1 12 MT116A MU116A
20 1 12 MT120A MU120A
25 1 12 MT125A MU125A
32 1 12 MT132A MU132A
40 1 12 MT140A MU140A
50 1 12 MT150A MU150A
MT106A 63 1 12 MT163A MU163A
Double pole MCB 2 2 6 - MU202A

4 2 6 - MU204A
1 3
6 2 6 MT206A MU206A
10 2 6 MT210A MU210A
2 4 16 2 6 MT216A MU216A
20 2 6 MT220A MU220A
25 2 6 MT225A MU225A
32 2 6 MT232A MU232A
40 2 6 MT240A MU240A
50 2 6 MT250A MU250A
63 2 6 MT263A MU263A
MT232A
Triple pole MCB 2 3 4 - MU302A

4 3 4 - MU304A
1 3 5
6 3 4 MT306A MU306A
10 3 4 MT310A MU310A
2 4 6
16 3 4 MT316A MU316A
20 3 4 MT320A MU320A
25 3 4 MT325A MU325A
32 3 4 MT332A MU332A
40 3 4 MT340A MU340A
50 3 4 MT350A MU350A
63 3 4 MT363A MU363A
MT363A
C.4
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 56
miniature circuit breakers 10kA type B & C - NB NC
Description Breaking capacity : Positive contact indication

Protection and control of circuits 10kA according to IEC 60 898 Red - contacts closed
against overloads and short 15kA according to IEC 60 947-2 Green - contacts open
circuits in domestic, commercial Will accept accessories, shunt
and industrial electrical distribu- 30kAIC according to NEMA AB-1 trips, auxiliary contact.
tion systems. Reference calibration see page 12
Temperature : 30°C
Technical data Voltage rating : 230/400V Connection capacity
NBxxxA = type B tripping Curent rating : 0.5 - 63A (up to 63A) :
NCxxxA = type C tripping Mechanical endurance : 25mm2 rigid conductor
according to IEC898 and BSEN 20 000 operations 16mm2 flexible conductor
60-898
Designation In/A Width in ❚ Pack Cat. Ref. Cat. Ref.

17.5mm qty. B curve C curve
Single pole MCB 0.5 1 12 - NC100A

1 1 12 - NC101A
1
2 1 12 - NC102A
3 1 12 - NC103A
4 1 12 - NC104A
2 6 1 12 NB106A NC106A
10 1 12 NB110A NC110A
16 1 12 NB116A NC116A
20 1 12 NB120A NC120A
25 1 12 NB125A NC125A
32 1 12 NB132A NC132A
40 1 12 NB140A NC140A
50 1 12 NB150A NC150A
63 1 12 NB163A NC163A
NB110A NC110A
Double pole MCB 0.5 2 6 - NC200A

1 2 6 - NC201A
1 3
2 2 6 - NC202A
3 2 6 - NC203A
4 2 6 - NC204A
2 4 6 2 6 NB206A NC206A
10 2 6 NB210A NC210A
16 2 6 NB216A NC216A
20 2 6 NB220A NC220A
25 2 6 NB225A NC225A
32 2 6 NB232A NC232A
40 2 6 NB240A NC240A
50 2 6 NB250A NC250A
63 2 6 NB263A NC263A
NC210A
Triple pole MCB 0.5 3 4 - NC300A

1 3 4 - NC301A
1 3 5 2 3 4 - NC302A
3 3 4 - NC303A
4 3 4 - NC304A
2 4 6 6 3 4 NB306A NC306A
10 3 4 NB310A NC310A
16 3 4 NB316A NC316A
20 3 4 NB320A NC320A
25 3 4 NB325A NC325A
32 3 4 NB332A NC332A
40 3 4 NB340A NC340A
NC310A 50 3 4 NB350A NC350A
63 3 4 NB363A NC363A
Four pole MCB 0.5 4 3 - NC400A

1 3 5 7
1 4 3 - NC401A
2 4 3 - NC402A
3 4 3 - NC403A
2 4 6 8
4 4 3 - NC404A
6 4 3 NB406A NC406A
10 4 3 NB410A NC410A
16 4 3 NB416A NC416A
20 4 3 NB420A NC420A
25 4 3 NB425A NC425A
32 4 3 NB432A NC432A
40 4 3 NB440A NC440A
NB410A 50 4 3 NB450A NC450A
63 4 3 NB463A NC463A
C.5
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 57
miniature circuit breakers for

commercial and industrial electrical installation systems
MCBs rating from 0.5 to 63A Curve D tripping:

curve “D” 10 to 20 times the rated current:
for installations containing loads
These miniature circuit breakers with high inrush currents
are used in commercial and (motors, transformers, ...)
industrial electical distribution
systems. Ranges:
NDN curve “D” 10000
MCBs ensure the protection IEC 60 898 15kA IEC 60947-2
against short circuit and over- from 0.5 to 63A
load current and the control and
isolation of circuits.
The new architecture of terminal NDN range Voltage rating: 230/400V AC Option:
guarantees an excellent grip of Auxiliaries:
the cables and a good tightening Busbar connection: Insulation voltage (Ui): 630V - allows remote indication of
comfort. - on the top with prong busbar main contact position
- on the bottom, the MCBs are Impulse voltage (Uimp): 6kV - allows remote tripping of the
The pull up terminal is a fool- equipped with bi-connect associated device
proof terminal which allows: terminals which allow Durability: 20,000 cycles (O-C)
- to avoid a bad insertion of connection with a fork busbar Locking kit to lock the toggle
cables in the product and a supply cable in the Calibration temperature: 30ºC in the ON or OFF position
- to guide the cable in the terminal. The busbar clip-on
terminal mechanically onto the casing Connection capacity: Terminal & screw shield and
of the MCB. - 25mm2 flexible conductor interpole barrier
The tripping mechanism is totally - 35mm2 rigid conductor
new. with a fast system of clos- Top and bottom removability: Foolproof terminal design RCD add-on block
ing, the withstand of contacts on thanks to new Din clips, an
all type of loads is increased. MCB can be added or Tightening torque: Busbar and connection
removed easily in a row of 4 Nm nominal accessories
On the MCB, the state of isola- products connected together
tion (according to IEC 60 947-2) with a busbar in case of Screw head: PZ2 and slot 6mm
is clearly indicated by the “OFF” maintenance or extension
mechanical position on the tog- IP rating: IP2x terminals
gle with green colour. Identification of the electrical
circuits can be easily done on Standard 35mm DIN rail
the front of all MCBs thanks
to a specific window on each
product.
Breaking capacity according to IEC60898 & IEC60947-2 Breaking capacity according to IEC60947-2 for low ratings
NDN NDN
Number of poles Voltage(V) Breaking Breaking In Breaking
capacity capacity capacity
Icn Icu Icu
IEC 60 898 IEC 60 947-2 IEC 60 947-2
1P 230 to 240 10,000 15kA 0.5 - 2A 80kA
400 to 415 - - 3A - 4A 50kA
2P, 3P, 4P 230 to 240 - 30kA 6A 30kA
400 to 415 10,000 15kA
C.6
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 58
miniature circuit breakers

D curve: IEC 60898: 10000 and IEC 60947-2: 15KA
Description Breaking capacity : Positive contact indication

Protection and control of circuits 10kA according to IEC 60 898 Red - contacts closed
against overloads and short 15kA according to IEC 60 947-2 Green - contacts open
circuits in commercial and Will accept accessories, shunt
industrial electrical distribution 30kAIC according to NEMA AB-1 trips, auxiliary contact.
systems. Reference calibration
Temperature : 30°C Connection capacity
Technical data Voltage rating : 230/400V 25mm2 rigid conductor
NDNxxxA = type D tripping Curent rating : 0.5 - 63A 16mm2 flexible conductor
according to IEC 60 898 Mechanical endurance :
20 000 operations
Designation In/A Width in ❚ Pack Cat. Ref.

17.5mm qty.
Single pole MCB 0.5 1 12 NDN100A

1 1 12 NDN101A
1
2 1 12 NDN102A
3 1 12 NDN103A
2 4 1 12 NDN104A
6 1 12 NDN106A
10 1 12 NDN110A
16 1 12 NDN116A
20 1 12 NDN120A
25 1 12 NDN125A
32 1 12 NDN132A
40 1 12 NDN140A
NDN116A 50 1 12 NDN150A
63 1 12 NDN163A
Double pole MCB 0.5 2 6 NDN200A

1 2 6 NDN201A
1 3
2 2 6 NDN202A
3 2 6 NDN203A
2 4
4 2 6 NDN204A
6 2 6 NDN206A
10 2 6 NDN210A
16 2 6 NDN216A
20 2 6 NDN220A
25 2 6 NDN225A
32 2 6 NDN232A
40 2 6 NDN240A
50 2 6 NDN250A
63 2 6 NDN263A
NDN 232A
Triple pole MCB 0.5 3 4 NDN300A

1 3 4 NDN301A
1 3 5
2 3 4 NDN302A
3 3 4 NDN303A
2 4 6 4 3 4 NDN304A
6 3 4 NDN306A
10 3 4 NDN310A
16 3 4 NDN316A
20 3 4 NDN320A
25 3 4 NDN325A
32 3 4 NDN332A
40 3 4 NDN340A
50 3 4 NDN350A
63 3 4 NDN363A
NDN320A
C.7
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 59

D curve: IEC 60898: 10000 and IEC 60947-2: 15KA

17.5mm qty.
Four pole MCB 0.5 4 3 NDN400A

1 4 3 NDN401A
1 3 5 7
2 4 3 NDN402A
3 4 3 NDN403A
2 4 6 8
4 4 3 NDN404A
6 4 3 NDN406A
10 4 3 NDN410A
13 4 3 NDN413A
16 4 3 NDN416A
20 4 3 NDN420A
NDN463A 25 4 3 NDN425A
32 4 3 NDN432A
40 4 3 NDN440A
50 4 3 NDN450A
63 4 3 NDN463A
accessories for miniature circuit breaker

NDN and NRN
qty.
Terminal shield/screw shield 4 MZN120

Prevents access to device terminals
this accessory can be sealed on each pole
MZN120
Inter-pole barrier 1 set of MZN121

Allows a clear isolation between poles 3 inter-pole
depending on the connection used barriers
MZN121
C.8
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 60

15 to 25kA type C - NRN
Type C tripping 25kA ( 25A ) Tripping curve: Connection capacity

20kA (32-40A) Type C magnetic setting 16mm2 flexible conductor
15kA (50-63A) 25mm2 rigid conductor
Applications: Complies with IEC 60 947-2
to IEC 60947-2 Commercial and industrial appli-
cations. Accessories
Current rating: - RCDs add-on blocks
0.5 to 63A - Auxiliaries
Designation Breaking In/A Width in I Pack Cat. Ref.

capacity kA 17.5mm qty.
Single pole MCB 25 0.5 1 12 NRN100

25 1 1 12 NRN101
25 2 1 12 NRN102
1
25 3 1 12 NRN103
25 4 1 12 NRN104
2
25 6 1 12 NRN106
25 10 1 12 NRN110
25 16 1 12 NRN116
25 20 1 12 NRN120
25 25 1 12 NRN125
20 32 1 12 NRN132
20 40 1 12 NRN140
NRN116 15 50 1 12 NRN150
15 63 1 12 NRN163
Double pole MCB 25 0.5 2 6 NRN200

25 1 2 6 NRN201
25 2 2 6 NRN202
1 3
25 3 2 6 NRN203
25 4 2 6 NRN204
2 4
25 6 2 6 NRN206
25 10 2 6 NRN210
25 16 2 6 NRN216
25 20 2 6 NRN220
25 25 2 6 NRN225
20 32 2 6 NRN232
20 40 2 6 NRN240
NRN232 15 50 2 6 NRN250
15 63 2 6 NRN263
Triple pole MCB 25 0.5 3 4 NRN300

25 1 3 4 NRN301
25 2 3 4 NRN302
1 3 5
25 3 3 4 NRN303
25 4 3 4 NRN304
2 4 6
25 6 3 4 NRN306
25 10 3 4 NRN310
25 16 3 4 NRN316
25 20 3 4 NRN320
25 25 3 4 NRN325
20 32 3 4 NRN332
20 40 3 4 NRN340
15 50 3 4 NRN350
NRN320 15 63 3 4 NRN363
Four pole MCB 25 0.5 4 3 NRN400

25 1 4 3 NRN401
25 2 4 3 NRN402
1 3 5 7
25 3 4 3 NRN403
25 4 4 3 NRN404
25 6 4 3 NRN406
2 4 6 8
25 10 4 3 NRN410
25 16 4 3 NRN416
25 20 4 3 NRN420
25 25 4 3 NRN425
20 32 4 3 NRN432
20 40 4 3 NRN440
15 50 4 3 NRN450
NRN440 15 63 4 3 NRN463
C.9
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 61

type C SP & N - ML
Description Technical data Connection capacity

Protection and control of Type C tripping characteristics 16mm2 rigid cables
circuits against overloads Breaking capacity : 10mm2 flexible cables + busbars
and short circuits. 6000A to IEC 60 898
Voltage rating : 230V
Current rating : 6-32A
Designation In/A Width in I Pack Cat. Ref.

17.5mm qty.
SP&N MCB - 6kA 6 1 12 ML506J
SP&N 10 1 12 ML510J
16 1 12 ML516J
20 1 12 ML520J
25 1 12 ML525J
32 1 12 ML532J
ML516J
C.10
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 62

80-125A
Thermal magnetic circuit The circuit breakers curve “D” - HMX curve “C”
breakers are particularly adapted to the 50 kA of 16 - 63 A :
protection of the circuits where width 1.5 ❚ / pole
curves “B” - “C” - “D” the installations are subject to
high in-rush currents. - HLE curve “B” 10000
In 80 to 125 A 10 kA of 80 - 100 - 125 A :
These circuit breakers are width 1.5 ❚ / pole
intended for the protection of the - HMB curve “B” 15000
circuits against overloads and 15 kA of 80 - 100 - 125 A : - HLF curve “C” 10000
short circuits in professional width 1.5 ❚ / pole 10 kA of 80 - 100 - 125 A :
premises (from residential to width 1.5 ❚ / pole
commercial and industrial - HMC curve “C” 15000
premises). 15 kA of 80 - 100 - 125 A :
width 1.5 ❚ / pole
The circuit breakers curve “B”
are particularly recommended - HMD curve “D” 15000
for the circuits with long cable 15 kA of 80 - 100 - 125 A :
length and for residential loads width 1.5 ❚ / pole
with low in-rush current.
The circuit breakers curve “C” - HMK curve “C”
are adapted to the protection of 30 kA of 80 - 100 - 125 A :
the circuits in professional width 1.5 ❚ / pole
premises.
These circuit breakers are Nominal voltage : 230/400 V - Terminals with tightening - RCD Add-on blocks, simple,
equipped with reinforced screw compensation. quick, adjustable and fixed
cages. insulation voltage: 500 V These circuit breakers are 1. assembly
equipped with screw cages 2. connection
A label holder is integrated Options : with tightening 3. locking
under the handle to ensure the - Auxiliary : compensation, reinforcement the assembly of the add-on
location of the product. • to visualise the state ON or cage, cable holding jaws. block is carried out very
OFF of the circuit breaker, These elements contribute to quickly and easily. Simple
The “OFF” position is clearly • to ON/OFF remotely the an effective cable tightening and fast : it is a Hager
shown by a green indicator circuit breaker over time. innovation. add-on blocks
below the handle. 125A are available in fixed
- Locking mechanism - These circuit breakers are version and adjustable
Suitable for isolation (according equipped with cable version.
to IEC 60947-2) : the isolation of - Terminal covers and phase terminals of type “fast on”
the circuit breakers is indicated separators upstream and downstream to
by a green indicator on the feed an auxiliary low voltage
handle. - RCD add-on blocks circuit (indicating lights,
auxiliary control...)
These circuit breakers have quick - Disassembly capability : Max. circuit 6A 6 mm2 maxi.
closing : fast and simultaneous Bistable DIN-rail latches
closing of the contacts, (2 positions) upstream and - Lockable handle
independent of the handling dowstream facilitate the MCB can be locked in “Off”
speed. assembly or the position by the integrated
disassembling of the circuit locking facility on the handle.
That increases the life of the breakers on the DIN-rail. This lock allows to insert a
circuit breaker whatever the type 2.5-3.5mm plastic cable tie
of load. where you can fit a warning
card if necessary and allows
a safer working environment
for all personnel.
Model Icc/Curve Accessories Fast-on Tightening Lockable Front product

connection comp. system handle labelling
HLE / HLF 10kA / B, C YES NO NO NO YES
HMB / HMC
HMD 15kA / B, C, D YES YES YES YES YES
HMK 30kA /C YES YES YES YES YES
HMX 50kA /C YES YES YES YES YES
C.11
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 63
miniature circuit breakers 80-125A

HLE, HLF; “B”-”C” 10000 - 10kA
Curves “B” and ”C” 10000 Tripping curves : Connection capacity :

“B” magnetic setting between - 35mm2 flexible wire
IEC 60898-1
3 and 5 In (50mm2 possible with some
10 kA “C” magnetic setting between cable end-caps),
IEC 60 947-2 5 and 10 In - 70mm2 rigid wire
In 80 to 125 A Use : KEMA
Residential, commercial and In conformity with the
industrial premises IEC 60 898-1, 947-2 approved
Designation In / A Width in ❚ Cat. Ref. Cat. Ref.

17.5 mm curve B curve C
Circuit breakers 1 pole 80 1.5 HLE180S HLF180S

1
100 1.5 HLE190S HLF190S
2
125 1.5 HLE199S HLF199S
HLF199S
Circuit breakers 2 pole 80 3 HLE280S HLF280S
1 3 100 3 HLE290S HLF290S
2 4
125 3 HLE299S HLF299S
HLF299F
Circuit breakers 3 pole 80 4.5 HLE380S HLF380S
1 3 5
100 4.5 HLE390S HLF390S
2 4 6 125 4.5 HLE399S HLF399S
HLF399S
Circuit breakers 4 pole 80 6 HLE480S HLF480S
1 3 5 7
100 6 HLE490S HLF490S
2 4 6 8 125 6 HLE499S HLF499S
HLF499S
C.12
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 64
miniature circuit breakers 80-125A

HMB, HMC, HMD; “B”, ”C”, “D” 15000 - 15kA
Curves “B”, ”C” and ”D” 15000 Tripping curves : Connection capacity :
IEC 60 898-1 “B” magnetic setting between - 35mm2 flexible wire
15 kA 3 and 5 In (50mm2 possible with some
IEC 60 947-2 “C” magnetic setting between cable end-caps)
5 and 10 In - 70mm2 rigid wire
In 80 to 125 A “D” magnetic setting between KEMA
10 and 20 In In conformity with the
IEC 60 898-1, 947-2 approved
Use :
Residential, commercial and
industrial premises
Designation In / A Width in ❚ Cat. Ref. Cat. Ref. Cat. Ref.

17.5 mm curve B curve C curve D
Circuit breakers 1 pole 80 1.5 HMB180 HMC180 HMD180
100 1.5 HMB190 HMC190 HMD190
125 1.5 HMB199 HMC199 HMD199
HMC199
Circuit breakers 2 pole 80 3 HMB280 HMC280 HMD280
100 3 HMB290 HMC290 HMD290
125 3 HMB299 HMC299 HMD299
HMC299
Circuit breakers 3 pole 80 4.5 HMB380 HMC380 HMD380
100 4.5 HMB390 HMC390 HMD390
125 4.5 HMB399 HMC399 HMD399
HMC399
Circuit breakers 4 pole 80 6 HMB480 HMC480 HMD480
100 6 HMB490 HMC490 HMD490
125 6 HMB499 HMC499 HMD499
HMC499
C.13
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 65

HMK; “C” - 30kA
Curve”C” Voltage: Connection capacity:

30 kA 230/400V - 50/60Hz - 35mm2 flexible wire
- 50mm2 rigid wire
In 80 to 125A Use:
Commercial and industrial In conformity with the
Magnetic setting between 5 premises IEC 60 497-2
and 10 In
Designation In/A Width in ❚ Pack. Cat. Ref.

17.5mm qty.
Circuit breakers 1 pole 80 1.5 1 HMK180
1 100 1.5 1 HMK190
125 1.5 1 HMK199

2
HMK199
Circuit breakers 2 pole 80 3 1 HMK280
1 3 100 3 1 HMK290
125 3 1 HMK299
2 4
HMK299
Circuit breakers 3 pole 80 4.5 1 HMK380
1 3 5 100 4.5 1 HMK390
125 4.5 1 HMK399

2 4 6
HMK399
Circuit breakers 4 pole 80 6 1 HMK480
1 3 5 7 100 6 1 HMK490
125 6 1 HMK499
2 4 6 8
HMK499
C.14
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 66

HMX; “C” - 50kA
Curve”C” Voltage: Connection capacity:

50kA 230/400V - 50/60Hz - 35mm2 flexible wire
- 50mm2 rigid wire
In 10 to 63A Use:
commercial and industrial In conformity with the
Magnetic setting between 5 and premises IEC 60 497-2
10 In
Designation In/A Width in ❚ Pack. Cat. Ref.

17.5mm qty. C curve
Circuit breakers 1 pole 10 1.5 1 HMX110

1 P.P. 16 1.5 1 HMX116
20 1.5 1 HMX120
1
25 1.5 1 HMX125
32 1.5 1 HMX132
2
40 1.5 1 HMX140
50 1.5 1 HMX150
63 1.5 1 HMX163
HMX120
Circuit breakers 2 pole 10 3 1 HMX210

2 P.P. 16 3 1 HMX216
20 3 1 HMX220
1 3 25 3 1 HMX225
32 3 1 HMX232
40 3 1 HMX240
2 4
50 3 1 HMX250
63 3 1 HMX263
HMX225
Circuit breakers 3 pole 10 4.5 1 HMX310

3 P.P. 16 4.5 1 HMX316
20 4.5 1 HMX320
1 3 5
25 4.5 1 HMX325
32 4.5 1 HMX332
40 4.5 1 HMX340
2 4 6
50 4.5 1 HMX350
63 4.5 1 HMX363
HMX320
Circuit breakers 4 pole 10 6 1 HMX410

4 P.P. 16 6 1 HMX416
20 6 1 HMX420
25 6 1 HMX425
1 3 5 7
32 6 1 HMX432
40 6 1 HMX440
2 4 6 8
50 6 1 HMX450
63 6 1 HMX463
HMX440
C.15
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 4/9/12 2:17 PM Page 67
accessories for circuit breakers

80 to 125A and HMX
Designation Characteristics Cat, Ref.
Terminal covers/ screw cap Allows to cover connection terminals, MZN130

screws of circuit breakers.
The screw covers can be sealed
MZN130
Phase separator 1 set of 3 phase separators MZN131
MZN131
remote control auxiliary

These products are remote Particular functioning modes This state is indicated by: - remote control impossible when
control auxiliaries for modular pro- - power interruption: • “a” and “b” contacts opening. tripping
tection devices (MCB, RCCB, When the power is interrupted, • the indicator light is intermittent red. (overloads or short-circuits):
RCBO). the product saves its state (time
They allow: delays, handle position and - forced remote closing: It is impossible to impose a
- to operate by remote control the number of trippings) in order to When “on” or sutomatic reclosing manual setting after tripping.
closing and opening contacts of reset when the power supply returns. are jammed, the controled device To reset, cable the contacts “a”
the associated device (MCB, has tripped 3 times or a time and “b” in ordeer and connect
RCD and RCBO). During the interruptions the indi- delay (3 mins or 30 secs) is them on “reset” control (input ˚6).
- to indicate the state of contacts cator light and the contacts “a” present, it is possibler to
and the tripping of the and “b” are open. reactivate them.
associated product. Connection capacity
If a control disappears during an To unjam “on” remotely, we must - Up:
The product MZ911, MZ912 has interruption, it is not executed activate “reset” postion (for 5 s) Rigid conductor: 1.5 to 10mm2
a further function which allows a when there is supply. until a green indicator light Flexible conductor: 1 to 6mm2
second automatic tripping when appears. - Down:
fault current. - soldered contacts on the asso Rigid conductor: 2 to 2.5mm2
ciated product: To reinitialise the automatic reset- Flexible conductor: 2 to 2.5mm2
In this case, the handle of the ting remotely, activate “reset” and
remote auxiliary positions itself in then “on”. Complies with EN 50-5557.
the centre as the handle of the To reinitialise locally, hold the side
associated device. selector.
Designation Characteristics Width in ❚ Pack. Cat. Ref.

17.5mm qty.
Auto reclosing remote for 1, 2, 3, 4 pole MCBs, 3 1 MZ911

control auxiliaries RCBOs, RCCB,
with or without add-on-block
for 1, 2, 3, 4 pole MCBs, 3 1 MZ912

RCBOs, RCCB,
with or without add-on-block
MZ912
C.16
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 4/9/12 2:17 PM Page 68
auxiliaries and accessories for

MCBs & RCCBs
All auxiliaries are common to Test mode for CZ001, MZ201, CZ001 must be fitted on the
both single and multi-pole circuit MZ202 : possible to test cabling RCCB before fitting maximum
breakers. These auxiliaries are of auxiliary circuits operation by one additional auxiliary (MZ203
fitted to the left hand side of tripping-over contacts manually. to MZ206).
devices. Resetting of contact occurs Up to 4 auxiliaries can be fitted
Fault indication, auxiliaries, simultaneously with MCB/RCCB on MCB.
shunt trips, and under-voltage resetting.
releases are fitted with a flag
indicator that indicates the auto-
matic/remote tripping of the
device.
Designation Description Width in ❚ Pack Cat. Ref.

17.5mm qty.
Auxiliary + alarm switch 1 module wide for 1 1 CZ001

for RCCB ON/OFF & trip indication
Auxiliary contacts 1NO + 1NC auxiliary contact 1/2 1 MZ201

6A - 230V~
3A - 440V~
Allows remote indication of
main contact status.
Å
MZ201
Signal contacts 1NO + 1NC signal contact 1/2 1 MZ202

6A - 230V~
3A - 440V~
Signal contact indicates a fault condition
(e.g. MCB tripped on overload or short circuit).
flag indicator red - MCB tripped
Shunt trip 230 - 415 Vac 1 1 MZ203

MZ204 Allows remote tripping of the device 110 - 130 Vdc
24 - 48 Vac 1 1 MZ204
12 - 48 Vdc
Under voltage release

Allows MCB to be closed only when voltage 48 Vdc 1 1 MZ205
is above 70% of Un. MCB will automatically
trip when voltage falls by 35% of Un 230 Vac 1 1 MZ206
Overvoltage auxiliary 230 Vac 1 1 MZ209

MZ205 Protects the installation from permanent
overvoltage
Combined Over & Under-voltage auxiliary 230 Vac 1 1 MZ214

Protects the installation from permanent
over and under voltage
Locking kit This allows locking of the device 2 MZN175

For the dolly of the device dolly in the on/off position.
supplied without padlock. will accept two padlocks with
hasps of 4.75mm diameter max.
MZN175
C.17
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 69
MCB
Type “B” curve Type “C” curve Type “D” curve

10000 10000 10000
6000 6000 6000
4000 4000 4000
3600 3600 3600
2000 2000 2000
1000 1000 1000
600 600 600
400 400 400
200 200 200
100 100 100

60 60 60
40 40 40
Time (sec)
Time (sec)
Time (sec)
20 20 20
10 10 10
6 6 6
4 4 4
2 2 2
1 1 1
0, 6 0, 6 0, 6
0, 4 0, 4 0, 4
0, 2
B 0, 2 0, 2
0, 1 0, 1 C 0, 1 D
0, 04 0, 04 0, 04
0, 02 0, 02 0, 02
0, 01 0, 01 0, 01
0, 004 0, 004 0, 004
1 1, 5 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20 30 40 1 1, 5 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20 30 40 1 1, 5 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20 30 40
1, 13 1, 13 1, 13
1, 45 1, 45 1, 45
I / In I / In I / In
Electrical characteristics
MCB type MY _ _ _E MT_ _ _A MU_ _ _A NB_ _ _A NC_ _ _A NDN_ _ _A NRN HMX HLE/F HMB/C/D HMK
Current rating 1 - 63A 6 - 63A 2 - 63A 6 - 63A 0.5 - 63A 0.5 - 63A 6 - 63A 25 - 63A 80-125A 80-125A 80-125A
Tripping curve
B: 3 - 5In
C: 5 - 10In C B C B C D C C B/C B/C/D C
D: 10 - 20In
Breaking capacity
EN 60 898 & IEC 898 4.5kA 6kA 6kA 10kA 10kA 10kA - - 10kA 15kA -
IEC 947 - 2 6kA 10kA 10KA 15kA 15kA 15KA 15/25kA 50kA 10kA 15kA 30kA
NEMA AB - 1 10KAIC 22KAIC 22KAIC 30KAIC 30KAIC 30KAIC 30KAIC - - - -
Rated voltage - 50/60Hz 230/400Vac (max. 440Vac) 240 / 415Vac
Isolating voltage 500V
Electrical endurance 0.5 to 32A 20 000 operations
40 to 125A 10 000 operations
Working temperature -5°C to +60°C
Tropicalisation Treatment 2 with relative humidity 95% at 55°C
Correction factor Grouping factor (rated current reduce by factor K)

Depending on the model selected some of the breaker is calibrated
at a temperature of 30°C in accordance to IEC 898.
Temperature correction
In (A) 30°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 55°C 60°C No. of units K
0.5 0.5 0.47 0.45 0.4 0.38 - - n=1 1
1 1 0.95 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 2≤n<4 0.95

4≤n<6 0.90
2 2 1. 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3
6≤n 0.85
3 3 2.8 2. 2. 2. 2.1 1.9
4 4 3.7 3. 3.3 3 2.8 2.5
6 6 5.6 5.3 5 4.6 4.2 3.8
10 10 9.4 8.8 8 7.5 7 6.4 Frequency
16 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Thermal - Unchanged
Magnetic - Value multiplied by coefficient K
20 20 18.5 17.5 16.5 15 14 13
25 25 23.5 22 20.5 19 17.5 16 F (Hz) 17Hz - 60Hz 100Hz 200Hz 400Hz
K 1 1.1 1.2 1.5
32 32 30 28 26 24 22 20
40 40 37.5 35 33 30 28 25
50 50 47 44 41 38 35 32 Installation
63 63 59 55 51 48 44 40 Working position : vertically, horizontally or flat.
Supply : feed from either top or bottom terminals.
80 80 77.6 75.1 72.6 70 67.2 64.4
100 100 96.6 93.1 89.4 85.6 81.6 77.5
125 125 121.9 118.9 115.7 112.4 109.1 105.6
C.18
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 70
MCB
I2T characteristics curve Current limitation curve

➝
energy let - through kA2s
➝
Peak current in kA
Estimated short - circuit in kA ➝ Estimated short - circuit in kA ➝
Power loss
The power loss of MCB’s is closely controlled by the standards and is
calculated on the basis of the voltage drop across the main terminals
measured at rated current. The power loss of Hager circuit breakers is
very much lower than that required by the IEC Standard, so in conse-
quences run cooler and are less affected when mounted together.
The table below gives the watts loss per pole at rated current.
MCB rated 0.5 1 2 3 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125

current (A)
Watt loss per 1.3 1.5 1.7 2.1 2.4 2.7 1.8 2.6 2;8 3.3 3.9 4.3 4.8 5.2 5 5.5 8
pole (W)
DC applications 2. system voltage

Because of their quick make and break design and excellent arc The system voltage and the type of system determines the number
quenching capabilities Hager circuit breakers are suitable for use on of poles required to provide the necessary breaking capacity and
DC. When selecting a circuit breaker for any DC application it is arc control. The table below gives the mximum DC voltage and
necessary to consider two main points. breaking capacity for one pole or two poles connected in the series;
The positioning of these breaking poles in the system depends on
1. rated current whether the system is earthed or insulated and if it is earthed
The thermal time/current characteristics is unaffected so that the cir- whether one polarity is earthed or the centre point is earthed.
cuit breaker will carry its rated current and operate within its desig-
nated thermal time/current zone at 40°C Derating for higher ambient MCB Breaking capacity
temperatures and grouping apply exactly the same as AC applica-
tions. The instantaneous magnetic trip is affected however, becom- 1 poles in 2 poles in 4 poles in Magnetic
ing less sensitive, requiring 2 times the AC operating current. The series/60V series/250V series/250V tripping
table below shows the upper and lower limits of both B and C MY 10kA 10kA - 5 - 15In
instantaneous characteristic curves for 50Hz C and DC applications. MT 15kA 15kA - 3 - 7.5In
Thermal unchanged. Magnetic trip increased as table below.
MU 15kA 15kA - 5 - 15In
NB 20kA 20kA 20kA 3 - 7.5In
NC 20kA 20kA 20kA 5 - 15In
Characteristics curve B C ND 15kA 15kA 15kA 13 - 28In
NM 10kA 10kA 10kA 5 - 15In
magnetic trip 50Hz DC 50Hz DC
NR 20kA 20kA 20kA 5 - 15In
Irm 1 3In 3In 5In 5In HLE 10kA 10kA 10kA 3 - 7.5In
Irm 2 5In 7.5In 10In 15In HLF 10kA 10kA 10kA 5 - 15In
HMB 15kA 15kA 15kA 3 - 7.5In
HMC 15kA 15kA 15kA 5 - 15In
HMD 15kA 15kA 15kA 13 - 28In
C.19
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 71
mniature circuit breakers 125A
Current limiting at 400 V

MCB’s : HMB MCB’s : HMC
10000
10000 125 A
125 A 100 A
100 A
4000
4000 80 A
80 A
1000
1000
400 80 A, 100 A, 125 A
➝
➝
400 80 A, 100 A, 125 A
intensité crête en kA2s

100
100
40
40
10
10
4
4
1
1 0, 4 1 4 10 40 100 1000 10000 100000
0, 4 1 4 10 40 100 1000 10000 100000
Icc en A ➝ Icc en A ➝
MCBs : HMC
10000 125 A
100 A
4000 80 A
1000
400 125 A
➝
100 A
80 A
100
40
10
1
0, 4 1 4 10 40 100 1000 10000 100000
Icc en A ➝
Short circuit limiting at 400 V

MCB’s : HMB, HMC MCB’s : HMD
10000 10000
80 A, 100 A, 125 A 80 A, 100 A, 125 A
5000 5000
➝
➝
Intensité crête en kA
Intensité crête en kA
1000 1000
500 500
100 100
100 500 1000 5000 10000 40000 100 500 1000 5000 10000 40000
C.20
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 72
remote control and automatic resetting auxiliary device
Functioning modes Side selector “time set”

For the front functioning modes “off & on” and “auto”, the remote Time delay of 3 mins is recommended for associated products before
controls “on”, “off”, “reset” and “ ” are operational (input n°2 - n°8). activating either remote control setting “on” or automatic reclosing.
These control settings can be made operational by a direct contact Even if it the device is reset before 3 mins the action will be delayed.
such as a push button or closing switch (e.g. automation, supervisor, However, for specific installations, when a continuity of service is
clocks etc.). required, the side selector can be set at 30 secs (except for MCBs
and RCBOs).
“on” remote control (input n°2)
It is jammed when: Supervision
• The selector or the controls activate “reset” or “ ” functions, “a” and “b” signal outputs
• Safety time delay is in progress, If “a” and “b” are closed (the position of the associated product or
• Trippings = 3 (end of cycle) remote control auxiliary handles is down), the cause could be:
• The contacts are soldered. • short-circuit, an overload or an earth leakage fault (depending on
the associated device),
“off” remote control (input n°4) • tripping = 3 (end of cycle).
Takes priority for “on” setting and automatic reclosing. If “a” and “b” are open (position of the handle down or central),
It is jammed when: the cause could be:
• Selector activates the “reset” or “ ” functions, • padlocking “ ” position, or “reset” position selected by either
• The contacts are soldered. remote control or manually
• controlled device out of order,
“reset” remote control (input n°6) • a safety time delay is in progress.
This control padlocks to the « on »position, the « off »position and
reinitialises the product. Indicator light
The initialisation consists of resetting the number of tripping and the The indicator light shows the state of the product and allows a diagnosis.
time delay (3 mins or 30 secs). We can distinguish 3 general cases:
This will remotely unjam the product. • indicator light on, the product is operational,
• indicator light off, the product is not supplied,
“ ” remote control (input n°8) • indicator light intermittent, the remote controls or the automatic
This control locks “on” and automatic reclosing. reclosing temporarily or permanently jammed.
“off” is available.
Caused by
The product does not operate if this control is not connected - Front selector padlocking position selected Remote control “reset”
(minimum). or “ ” positions selected
- Timer delay activated
- 3 trippings end of cycle.
If a red intermittent light is present, the controlled device is out of
order.
Connection diagram
t i me
set
30s 3mi n
3
C.21
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 73
auxiliaries
Functions MZN203 / MZN204 shunt trip

Tripping and indication auxiliary contacts are common to the range Allows tripping of the device by feeding the coil. It is fitted with
of Hager MCBs and RCCBs. internal contacts which allow it to be fed by an impulse or latched
They should be mounted on the left hand side of the device. feed.
The contacts also allow for remote indication of operation.
Auxiliary contact MZ201
Allows remote indication of the status of the device contacts to MZN205 / MZN206 under voltage release
which it is associated. Allows the MCB to trip when the voltage drops or by pressing a
remote off switch (ie emergency stop).
Alarm contact MZ202
The alarm or signal contact will provide indication if the breaker trips
under fault conditions
Note
Default indication auxiliaries and shunt trips or under voltage
releases are fitted with tripping indications and reset facility.
Emergency switch - off with under voltage release Sizes
Note : control circuit must be protected using a maximum 6A

curve C MCB.
Recapitulative table
MZ201 MZ202 CZ001 MZ203 MZ204 MZ205 MZ206

2X
1O + 1C 1O + 1C 1O + 1C
230V~ 6A 230V~ 6A 230V~ 6A
440V~ 3A 440V~ 3A 400V~ 3A
230 to 415V~ 24 to 48V~ 48V 230V~
110 to 130V= 12 to 48V=
50Hz 50Hz 50Hz 50Hz
Grouping / combination of several auxiliaries
On 2, 3 and 4 pole MCBs it is possible to associate 3 auxiliaries -

2 indication auxiliaries and 1 release auxiliary. In this case, it is
important to first fix the indication auxiliary (MZ 201 and MZ 202)
and then the release auxiliary (MZ 203/204 and MZ 205/206)
C.22
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 74
RCD add-on blocks (63A)
Description All devices have a test facility Connection capacities :

RCD add-on blocks for use with All devices except 10mA and 25 A : 6mm2 flexible cable
MCB ranges MY, MT, MU, NB, 100mA, are type AC. 10mm2 rigid cable
NC, ND, NR up to 63A. 10mA and 100mA are type A. 40, 63 A : 16mm2 flexible cable
All devices are protected against 25mm2 rigid cable
Technical data : nuisance tripping and transient
High sensitivity : voltages
10-30 mA instant tripping
Medium sensitivity : Nominal voltage :
100-500 mA instant tripping 2 poles 230V
300 - 500mA selective (time 3 and 4 poles : 230/400V
delay)
Comply with IEC 60 1009
These devices are designed to
be fitted on the right hand side
of the 2, 3 and 4 poles MCB’s.
The combination device then

provides protection against
overload, short circuits and
earth leakage faults.
Designation Type Sensitivity In/A Width in ❚ Pack Cat. Ref.

In 17.5mm qty.
2 poles add-on blocks A 10 mA 25A 2 1 BC225N

AC 30 mA 25A 2 1 BD226N
AC 40A 2 1 BD241N
AC 63A 2 1 BD264N
A 100 mA 25A 2 1 BE225N
A 63A 2 1 BE263N
AC 300 mA 25A 2 1 BF226N
AC 40A 2 1 BF241N
AC 63A 2 1 BF264N
AC 500 mA 63A 2 1 BG264N
AC 300 mA 63A 2 1 BP264N
BD226N
AC 500 mA 63A 2 1 BR264N
3 poles add-on blocks AC 30 mA 25A 2 1 BD326N

AC 40A 3 1 BD341N
AC 63A 3 1 BD364N
A 100 mA 25A 3 1 BE325N
A 63A 3 1 BE363N
AC 300 mA 25A 2 1 BF326N
AC 40A 3 1 BF341N
AC 63A 3 1 BF364N
AC 500 mA 63A 3 1 BG364N
AC 300 mA 63A 3 1 BP364N
BD364N AC 500 mA 63A 3 1 BR364N
4 poles add-on blocks AC 30 mA 25A 2 1 BD426N

AC 40A 3 1 BD441N
AC 63A 3 1 BD464N
A 100mA 25A 3 1 BE425N
A 63A 3 1 BE463N
AC 300 mA 25A 2 1 BF426N
AC 40A 3 1 BF441N
AC 63A 3 1 BF464N
AC 500 mA 63A 3 1 BG464N
AC 300 mA 63A 3 1 BP464N
AC 500 mA 63A 3 1 BR464N
BD426N
C.23
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 75
RCD add-on blocks type AC , type A and HI

for circuit breakers HLE, HLF, HMB, HMC, HMD, HMK, HMX
RCD add-on blocks for circuit Adjustable blocks : HI (High Immunity) : Assembly and disassembly
Breakers HMB, HMC, HMD, The setting is done by actuating The products with “reinforced facilitated by the drawer assembly
HLE, HLF, HMK, HMX. the thumbwheel in front face. immunity” reduce the unexpected system. The terminal cover is
The setting thumbwheels are pro- tripping when they protect dependent of the add-on block.
Fixed : tected by a transparent sealable equipment generating disturbances It is provided with jeying systems
- high sensitivity 30 cover. (micro-processing, electronic avoiding the omission of terminal
mA ballast,...) tightening downstream of the
instantaneous Dissassembly : circuit breaker. .
- average sensitivity The bistable latch (2 positions) The differential defect or earth fault
300 mA - facilitate the assembly or dissas- is visualized by the rearmament Nominal voltage: -15 +10 %
instantaneous. sembly by the bottom of the “cir- handle of the block in low position 2 poles: 230 V
cuit breaker + block.” (yellow colour). Three and four-pole: 230/400 V
Settings : Test button for differential functioning Test button: 230/400 V.
- sensitivity In 0.3 - 0.5 - 1 A ... These RCD add-on blocks exist check.
- delay t 0 - 60 -150 ms. in version AC and in version A-HI. In conformity with the
Tightening compensation requirements of the appendix G
These devices are intended to Version AC : cages of the IEC 61009-1.
be fixed on the right side of the The add-on blocks are protected These circuits breakers blocks
circuit breakers to form differen- against unexpected tripping cau- are equipped with screw cages In conformity with the
tial circuit breakers from 80 to sed by the transitory leakage with tightening compensation, requirements of standard
125A, two, three or four-pole. currents : lightning, capacitive reinforcement arch, cable holding IEC 60947-2.
loading. jaws. These elements contribute
This “circuit breaker + block” to an effective tightening over time.
ensures, in addition to the over- Version A HI :
load and short circuit protection, Type A : Connection capacity :
the protection of the installations when the electrical load is likely to - 35mm2 flexible connection
against the insulation defects produce fault component dc pulsa- (50mm2 possible with some
(300mA and 1A) and the protec- ting current, the protection of the terminals),
tion of the people against the people must be carried out by dif- - 70mm2 rigid connection.
direct contacts (30mA) and indi- ferentials of type A.
rect (300mA).
Designation Sensitivity In / A Width in ❚ Cat. Ref Cat. Ref

fixed / adjustable 17.5 mm add-on add-on
In blocks AC blocks A-HI
Add-on blocks 2 poles Fixed 125 6 BDC280E BDH280E
2 P.P. 30 mA
Adjustable 125 6 BTC280E BTH280E

0.3 - 0.5 - 1 A
0- 60 - 150
BTC280E
Add-on blocks 4 poles Fixed 125 6 BDC380E BDH380E
3 P.P 30 mA

0.3 - 0.5 - 1 A
0- 60 - 150
ms
BTH380E Add-on blocks 4 poles Fixed 125 6 BDC480E BDH480E

4 P.P 30 mA
Fixed 125 6 BFC480E BFH480E
300 mA

0.3 - 0.5 - 1 A
0- 60 - 150
BDC480E ms
Association circuit breaker + add-on block 4 poles adjustable
C.24
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 76
RCD add-on blocks
Assembly of the add-on blocks 63 A and 80-125A
In
A specific keying
system will
prevent assembly
of an add-on
block of a rating
lower than the
one of the MCB.
By pushing the “lock” button it

will bolt both devices together
mechanically, thus forbidding a
dismantling of the products with-
out deteriorating the add-on
block (compliance to annex G of
standard EN 61-009) .
Dimensions of associated MCB / add-on block
E E
E
2 P.P. 6 to 63 A 4❚
2 P.P. HM 80 to 125 A 9❚
3 P.P. 6 to 25 A 5❚
3 P.P. 32 to 63 A 6❚
3 P.P. HM 80 to 125 A 10.5 ❚
4 P.P. 6 to 25 A 6❚
4 P.P. 32 to 63 A 7❚
4 P.P. 6 to 63 A 7❚
4 P.P. HM 80 to 125 A 12 ❚
add-on blocks 25, 40, 63, 80, 100 * 4 pole add-on blocks
and 125A two output
Wiring diagram for MCB+Add-on block from 25 to 125A
incoming Connection capacities :

1 3 2 2
for assembled products from 6 to 25A : 6 mm / 10 mm
2 2
for assembled products from 32 to 63 A : 10 mm / 25 mm
2 2
for assembled products from 80 to 125A : 35 mm / 70 mm
Test
If the supply of the add-on block is done from the bottom it should
be clearly indicated.
2 4
use
C.25
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 77
2 and 4 pole residual current devices (RCCBs/ ELCBs)
Description Ambient temperature range : Nuisance tripping

To open a circuit automatically in -5 to + 40°C All the RCCBs are protected
the case of an earth leakage against transient voltages
fault between phase and earth Positive contact indication : (lightning, line disturbances) and
and / or neutral greater or equal Mechanical indicator, appearing transient currents (from high
to 10, 30, 100, 300 or 500mA; on the front face of the RCCB, capacitive circuits).
use in domestic, commercial and linked to the contacts shows the DC sensitive RCCBs or time
industrial installations. positive opening of all poles, delay devices are available,
red = contacts closed please consult us.
Technical data green = contacts open You also have the possibility to
Nominal voltage : install the following accessories :
2 pole 127/230V - 50Hz Earth fault indicator electrical auxiliaries
4 pole 230/400V - 50Hz Mechanical indicator terminal cover kit
specifications : IEC 61008-1 SS97 appearing on the front face of locking kit
the RCCB to differenciate
Connection capacity : between tripping and off position
16-63A rigid 25mm2 yellow - tripped
flexible 16mm2
80-100A rigid 50mm2
flexible 35mm2
Sensitivity Current Pack Cat.Ref. Pack Cat. Ref.

IΔn qty. 2 poles qty. 4 poles
High sensitivity 10mA 16A 1 CC216B - -

25A 1 CC225B - -
30mA 16A 1 CD216B

25A 1 CD225B 1 CD425B
40A 1 CD240B 1 CD440B
63A 1 CD263B 1 CD463B
80A 1 CD280B 1 CD482B
100A 1 CD284B 1 CD485B
Medium sensitivity 100mA 25A 1 CE225B 1 CE425B

40A 1 CE240B 1 CE440B
CD240B 63A 1 CE263B 1 CE463B
80A 1 CE280B 1 CE480B
100A 1 CE284B 1 CE484B
Low sensitivity 300mA 25A 1 CF225B 1 CF425B

40A 1 CF240B 1 CF440B
63A 1 CF263B 1 CF463B
80A 1 CF280B 1 CF480B
100A 1 CF284B 1 CF484B
Low sensitivity 500mA 25A 1 CG225B 1 CG425B

40A 1 CG240B 1 CG440B
CD440B 63A 1 CG263B 1 CG463B
80A 1 CG280B 1 CG480B
100A 1 CG284B 1 CG484B
Terminal cover kit for RCCBs 2I 16 to 63A 10 sets CZN005

(1 set = 2 covers) for RCCBs 4I 16 to 63A 10 sets CZN006
for RCCBs 2I 80 to 100A 10 sets CZ007
for RCCBs 4I 80 to 100A 10 sets CZ008
Locking kit : 1 MZN175
C.26
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 78
RCCBs - selective product range type S (delay)
The selective Residual Current Technical data Earth fault indicator :

Circuit Breakers are available nominal voltage : Breaker tripping due to earth
with 100, 300 mA sensitivity in 2-pole 127-230V fault shown by yellow window
2 and 4 pole version. 4-pole 230-400V
Transient protected :
A selective RCCBs is time Surge current withstand(8/20s): Protected against nuisance
delayed ( min. 300ms at In). Standard : 250A tripping
And it is commonly used as a Selective : 3kA
main breaker to prevent Type AC Standard : IEC 61008-1,
nuisance tripping due to
transient overvoltages and Positive contact indication :
provide discrimination with the Red : contacts closed
downstream standard RCCBs. Green : contacts open
Type In (A) Mod. Cat. ref. Cat. Ref.

100mA 300mA
2-pole 40A 2 CN240B -

Selective
4-pole 40A 4 CN440B CP440B

Selective 63A 4 CN463B CP463B
80A 4 CN480B CP480M
CN240B
Alarm and auxiliary contact 5A/230V 1 CZ001 CZ001

Auxiliary contact for remote
indication of breaker position,
and alarm contact for remote
fault indication.
Terminal cover kit for RCCBs 2I 16 to 63A 10 sets - CZN005

(1 set = 2 covers) for RCCBs 4I 16 to 63A 10 sets - CZN006
CN463B
RCCBs - HI (high immunity) series type A
Sensitivity Pole Current Pack Cat. Ref.

(mA) (A) qty.
30mA 2 25 6 CH225J
4 40 6 CH440J
300mA 2 40 6 CQ240J
CH225J
2 63 6 CQ263J
4 40 3 CQ440J
4 63 3 CQ463J
Auxiliary & fault contacts 1 CZ001
CQ463J
C.27
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 79
combined MCB/ RCD (RCBO) 6kA
Description Technical data :

Compact protection devices The units are available with Mechanical life :
which provide MCB overcurrent current ratings of 6A, 10A, 16A, 2 000 operations
protection and RCCB earth 20A, 25A, 32A and 40A. The
leakage protection in a single device switches both the phase 6kA IEC 61 009-1
unit. and neutral conductors. All 10kA IEC 60 947-2
ratings have 10mA, 30mA,
Specification 100mA or 300mA earth leakage Type AC
IEC 61009-1 protection. The units feature
indicators which show whether Connection capacity
Protected against transient tripping is due to an overcurrent Rigid conductor 25mm2
voltages (lightning, line distur- or earth leakage fault. Flexible conductor 16mm2
bances,...) and transient currents
(from high capacitive circuits) Voltage rating - 127-230V
Current rating - 6-40A.
Designation Sensitivity In/A Breaking Width in ❚ Pack Cat. Ref. Cat. Ref.
IDn capacity 17.5mm qty. type B type C
RCBO 1P+N 10mA 16 6kA 2 1 AC916B AC966B
30mA 6 6kA 2 1 AD906B AD956B

10 2 1 AD910B AD960B
16 2 1 AD916B AD966B
20 2 1 AD920B AD970B
25 2 1 AD925B AD975B
32 2 1 AD932B AD982B
40 2 1 AD940B AD990B
100mA 6 6kA 2 1 AE956B

10 2 1 AE960B
16 2 1 AE966B
20 2 1 AE970B
AD916B
25 2 1 AE975B
32 2 1 AE982B
40 2 1 AE990B
300mA 6 6kA 2 1 AF956B

10 2 1 AF960B
16 2 1 AF966B
20 2 1 AF970B
25 2 1 AF975B
32 2 1 AF982B
40 2 1 AF990B
Grey terminal cover 1 AZ002
C.28
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 80
combined MCB/ RCD (RCBO) 10kA
Description Technical data : Mechanical life :

Compact protection devices The units are available with 2000 operations
which provide MCB overcurrent current ratings of 6A, 10A, 16A, 10kA IEC61009-1
protection and RCCB earth 20A, 25A, 32A and 40A. The
leakage protection in a single device switches both the phase Type AC
unit. and neutral conductors. All
ratings have 10mA, 30mA, Connection capacity
Specification 100mA or 300mA earth leakage Rigid conductor 25mm2
IEC 61009-1 protection. The units feature Flexible conductor 16mm2
indicators which show whether
Protected against transient tripping is due to an overcurrent
voltages (lightning, line or earth leakage fault.
disturbances,...) and transient
currents (from high capacitive Voltage rating - 127-230V
circuits) Current rating - 6-40A.
Designation Sensitivity In/A Breaking Width in I Pack Cat. Ref. Cat. Ref.
IDn capacity 17.5mm qty. type B type C
RCBO 1P+N 10mA 6 10kA 2 1 AC506B AC556B

10 2 1 AC510B AC560B
16 2 1 AC516B AC566B
30mA 6 10kA 2 1 AD506B AD556B

10 2 1 AD510B AD560B
16 2 1 AD516B AD566B
20 2 1 AD520B AD570B
25 2 1 AD525B AD575B
32 2 1 AD532B AD582B
AD582B
100mA 6 10kA 2 1 AE506B AE556B

10 2 1 AE510B AE560B
16 2 1 AE516B AE566B
20 2 1 AE520B AE570B
25 2 1 AE525B AE575B
32 2 1 AE532B AE582B
300mA 6 10kA 2 1 AF506B AF556B

10 2 1 AF510B AF560B
16 2 1 AF516B AF566B
20 2 1 AF520B AF570B
25 2 1 AF525B AF575B
32 2 1 AF532B AF582B
Grey terminal cover AZ002
C.29
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 81
RCBO electronic
Description Technical data Operation temperature :

Compact one module protection Specification -25°c to +55°C
devices which combine the complies with IEC 61 009-2
overcurrent functions of an MCB Features
with the earth fault functions of Sensitivity (fixed) 1 module devices provide a
an RCD. A range of senstivity 10 - 30 - 100 - 300 mA compact solution for installation
and current ratings are available in consumer units, Invicta TP+N
for use in commercial and indus- Terminal capacities : distribution boards, and din rail
trial applications 1 module type - 16mm2 rigid enclosures. These devices are
10mm2 flexible 1P & solid neutral.
Operating voltage
110 - 230 V AC
Flying neutral lead length 700mm
Sensitivity In Breaking In/A Width in ❚ Pack Cat. Ref. Cat. Ref.
mA capacity 17.5mm qty. type B type C
10mA 6kA 16A 1 1 AC107 AC122
30mA 6kA 6A 1 1 AD104 AD119

10A 1 1 AD105 AD120
16A 1 1 AD107 AD122
20A 1 1 AD108 AD123
25A 1 1 AD109 AD124
32A 1 1 AD110 AD125
40A 1 1 AD111 AD126
45A 1 1 AD112 AD127
50A 1 1 AD113 AD128
AD110 100mA 6kA 6A 1 1 AE106Z

10A 1 1 AE110Z
16A 1 1 AE116Z
20A 1 1 AE120Z
25A 1 1 AE125Z
32A 1 1 AE132Z
40A 1 1 AE140Z
45A 1 1 AE145Z
50A 1 1 AE150Z
300mA 6kA 20A 1 1 AF120Z

25A 1 1 AF125Z
32A 1 1 AF132Z
40A 1 1 AF140Z
30mA 10kA 6A 1 1 AD184

10A 1 1 AD185
16A 1 1 AD187
20A 1 1 AD188
25A 1 1 AD189
32A 1 1 AD190
40A 1 1 AD191
C.30
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 82
RCCB (ELCB)
Residual current devices

A residual current device (RCD) is the generic term for a device
which monitors the current in the line conductor and the neutral
conductor of a circuit in an earthed system.
The drawing opposite shows how a torroid is located around the line
and neutral conductors to measure the magnetic fields created by
the current flowing in these conductors. The sum of the magnetic
fileds set up by these currents (which takes into consideration both
the magnetic and phase relationship of the currents) is detected by
the torroid.
In a normal heathy circuit the vector sum of the current values

added together will be zero. Current flowing to earth, due to a line
earth fault, will return wia the hearth conductor, and regardless of
load conditions will register as a fault. This current flow will give rise
to a residual current (Ires) which will be detected by the device.
It is most important that the line and neutral conductors are passed
through the torroid. A common cause of nuisance operation is the
failure to connect the neutral through the device.
RCCBs work just as well on three phase or three phase and neutral
circuits, but when the neutral is distributed it must pass through the
torroid.
RCCB are not suitable for use on DC systems and unearthed net-
works.
RCCBs - domestic installation Pulsating DC fault current sensitive

RCCBs can be installed in two ways : Increasingly, semi-conductors are also extensively used in computers,
VDUs, printers, plotters,... all of which may be fed from the lain
1. whole house protection electrical supply. The presence of semi - conductors may result in
2. selective protection the normal sinusoidal AC waveform being modified. For example,
the waveform may be rectifed or, as in asymmetric phase control
Whole house protection is provided typically by a consumer unit devices, the waveform may be chopped. The resulting waveforms
where the RCCB device serves as the main switch. Although very are said to have a pulsating DC component.
popular this suffers from a disadvantage : all circuits are disconnect-
ed in the event of fault. Selective protection can be provided by In the event of an earth fault occuring in equipment containing
associating the RCCB with identified high risk circuits by adopting conductor devices, there is a probability that the earth fault current
one or more of the following : will contain a pulsating DC component.
Split busbar consumer unit Standard types of RCCB may not respond to this type of earth fault
All circuits are fed via an overall isolator and selected circuits fed current and the intended degree of protection will not be provided.
additionally via the RCCB. Typical circuits fed direct are lighting,
freezer, storage heating : and circuits fed via the RCCB are socket Check for symbol :
outlets, garage circuits. This concept minimises inconvenience in the
event of fault. Hager provide a range of pulsating d.c. sensitive devices for this
type of application.
Whole ring circuit
A 30mA device adjacent to the consumer unit, which provides pro-
tection for the downstairs ring circuit, provides an easy installation
with protection for all associated socket outlets. This represents the Tripping characteristics
best solution for upgrading existing installations.
Type In(A) IΔn(A) Standard values of break time(s) and
Nuisance tripping non-actuating time(s) at a residual current (I)
All Hager RCCBs incorporate a filtering device preventing the risk of
nuisance tripping due to transient voltages (lightning, line distur- equal to :
bances on other equipment...) and transient currents (from high 0.5IΔn IΔn 2IΔn 5IΔn 500A
capacitive circuit).
general any ≤ 0.03 no trip 0.1s 0.1s 0.04s 0.04s max.
Check for the symbol : value break
times
> 0.03 no trip 0.3s 0.15s 0.04s 0.04s max.
break
times
C.31
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 83
RCCB
Protection against shock outside the equipotential bonding zone The provision of residual current protection throughout a system or
in vulnerable parts of a system will greatly reduce the hazard of fire
Bonding conductors are used in an installation to maintain metallic caused by such faults.
parts, as near as possible, to the same potential as earth.
Working with portable equipment outside this equipotential bonding PEN conductors
zone, e.g. in the car park of a factory, introduces The use of RCCBs is PEN conductors is prohibited. A PEN conduc-
additional shock hazards. Socket outlets rated 32A or less ‘which ay tor is a single conductor combining the functions of neutral conduc-
be reasonably expected to supply portable tor and protective conductor. This being so, when the PEN conduc-
equipment for use outdoors’ should have at least one socket nomi- tor is taken through the torroid of an RCCB, earth faults will go
nated for outdoor use. This socket should be equipped with RCC undetected because the return path for the earth fault current is
protection unless fed from an isolating transformer or similar device, included in the resiual sum.
or fed from a reduced voltage.
Use of Hager RCCBs on 3 phase 3 wire systems
Protection in special situations (IEE wiring regulation) The Hager range of 4 pole RCCBs can be used to provide residual
The use of RCCBs is obligatory or recommended in the following current protection of 3 phase, 3 wire circuits (no neutral).
situations :
- Caravans : 30mA RCCBs should be used
- TT systems
- Swimming pools : 30mA RCCB for socket outlets in zone B

obligatory; recommended in zone C.
- Agricultural and horticultural : 30mA RCCB for socket outlets and Supply entry
for the purpose of protection against fire, RCCB 0.5A sensitivity. Top or bottom feed.
- Construction sites : 30mA RCCB recommended

RCCBs /MCBs co-ordination
Portable equipment
With the exception mentioned above, where a socket is specifically with MCBs
designated for work outside the equipotential bonding zone, the RCCBs MY MT/MU NB/ HLE NC/ HLF NDN
Wiring Regulations demand the use of RCCBs to protect the users of 1-63A 2-63A 6-100A 0.5-100A 6-63A
portable equipment. It is widely recognised that their use has made a C B/C B C D
significant contribution to safety in the workplace and the home. 2 poles
16A 4.5kA 6kA 10kA 10kA 10kA
25A 4.5kA 6kA 10kA 10kA 10kA
Protection against fire hazards 40A 4.5kA 6kA 10kA 10kA 10kA
The provisions in the Wiring Regulations for protection against 63A 4.5kA 6kA 10kA 10kA 10kA
shock by indirect contact ensure rapid disconnection under earth 80A 4.5kA 6kA 10kA 10kA 10kA
fault assuming the fault has negligible impedance. Under such con- 100A 4.5kA 6kA 10kA 10kA 10kA
ditions the fault current, as we have seen, is 4 poles
sufficiently great to cause the overcurrent protection device to 16A 4.5kA 6kA 10kA 10kA 10kA
quickly disconnect the fault. However high impedance faults can 25A 4.5kA 6kA 10kA 10kA 10kA
arise where the fault current is sufficient to cause 40A 4.5kA 6kA 10kA 10kA 10kA
considerable local heat without being high enough to cause tripping 63A 4.5kA 6kA 10kA 10kA 10kA
of the overcurrent protective device. The heat 80A 4.5kA 6kA 10kA 10kA 10kA
generated at the point of the fault may initiate a fire long before the 100A 4.5kA 6kA 10kA 10kA 10kA
fault has deteriorated into a low impedance connection to earth.
Positive contact indication TEST : test regularly : RCCB must trip.
OFF ON
green red Te st Te st
or
Test
Te st t
Te s
OFF
grey yellow
C.32
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 84
earth leakage relays and

torroidal transformers
Technical characteristics: - Max. cable length to torroids: Torroids:

- Voltage range : 25m non-twisted cable 0.5 to - Frequency: 50 / 60 Hz
2
230V +/- 20% 1.5mm 50m twisted cable - Working temperature:
- Network voltage: 50 to 700 V - 10 to + 55°C
- Frequency: 50 / 60 Hz - Standards: IEC 60755, - Storage temperature:
- Working temperature: IEC 947-2 annex B, - 25 to + 70°C
- 10 to +55°C IEC 61543, IEC 61008-1, - IP rating: IP 41
- Storage temperature: IEC 61000-6 & IEC 60755
-25 to +70°C
Designation Characteristics Power Positive Cat. ref.

absorbed safety
contact
Earth leakage relays fixed IΔn: 0.03A 3VA HR500

non adjustable instantaneous tripping
fixed IΔn: 0.3A 3VA HR502

instantaneous tripping
Earth leakage relays adjustable IΔn: 5VA 1 C/O HR510

adjustable 0.03-0.1-0.3-0.5-1-3-10A
delay settings:
inst - 0.1-0.3-0.4-0.5-1-3s
adjustable IΔn: 5VA 1 C/O HR522

0.03-0.1-0.3-0.5-1-3-10A
delay settings:
inst -0.1-0.2-0,25-0.3-0.4-0.5s
HR522
0,5-1-3-5-10-20-30A
delay settings:
inst -0.1-0.2-0.25-0.3-0.4-0.5s

0.03-0.1-0.3-0.5-1-3-10A
delay settings:
inst/sel/0.02/0.1s/0.3s/0.4s/0.5s/
0.75s/1s/3s/5s/10s
HR525

17.5mm qty.
Earth leakage relays Instant trip or time delay 4 1 HR440

with integrated 0.1s/0.3s/0.5s/0.75s/1s
torroid 25mm adjustable delay:
0.03A/ 0.1A/ 0.3A/ 0.5A/ 1A/ 3A
with integrated Instant trip or time delay 6 1 HR441

torroid 35mm 0.1s/0.3s/0.5s/0.75s/1s
adjustable delay:
0.03A/ 0.1A/ 0.3A/ 0.5A/ 1A/ 3A
HR700
Circular torroids Internal Ø30 mm HR700

Internal Ø35 mm HR741
Rectangular torroids 75 x 175 mm HR830

115 x 305 mm HR831
HR831 150 x 350 mm HR832
200 x 350 mm HR833
C.33
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 85
earth leakage relays
Technical characteristics
C.34
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 86
torroids for earth leakage relays
Circular torroids :
HR700
32
Ø 30 Ø 59
70
30
HR741 to HR745 Dimensions for circular torroids (in mm)
E 63 ref. A B C D E F G
33
HR741 Ø 35 79 100 35 43 26 48.5
F
D
8 HR742 Ø 70 110 130 52 57 32 66
C 6,5 G HR743 Ø 105 146 170 72 73 38 94

A HR744 Ø 140 196 220 97 98 48.5 123
HR745 Ø 210 284 299 141 142 69 161
B 48 mm
C.35
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:33 AM Page 87
torroids for earth leakage relays
Torroid capacity
U 1000 R2V U 1000 R2V U 1000 R2V U 1000 R2V U 1000 R2V U 1000 R2V
copper copper copper copper copper copper
(1 conductor) (1 conductor) (2 conductors) (4 conductors) (4 conductors) (2 conductors)
stripped stripped
torroid torroid torroid torroid torroid torroid
Torroid
inner
diameter
2 2 2 2 2 2
30 HR700 4 x 16 mm 2 x 50 mm 35 mm 35 mm 35 mm 50 mm
2 2 2 2 2 2
35 HR741 4 x 25 mm 2 x 70 mm 35 mm 50 mm 35 mm 70 mm
2 2 2 2 2 2
70 HR742 4 x 185 mm 2 x 400 or 4 x 150 mm 35 mm 240 mm 35 mm 300 mm
2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
70 x 175 HR830 4 x 630 mm 2 x 630 or 4 x 240 mm 35 mm 300 mm 35 mm 300 mm
2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
H07 V - U H07 V - U
copper copper
(1 conductor) (1 conductor)
torroid torroid
Torroid inner
diameter
2 2
30 HR700 4 x 35 mm 2 x 70 mm
2 2
35 HR741 4 x 50 mm 2 x 95 mm
2 2
70 HR742 4 x 240 mm 2 x 400 or 4 x 185 mm
2 2
105 HR743 4 x 400 mm 2 x 400 or 4 x 240 mm
2 2
140 HR744 4 x 400 mm 2 x 400 or 4 x 240 mm
2 2
210 HR745 4 x 400 mm 2 x 400 or 4 x 240 mm
2 2
70 x 175 HR830 4 x 400 mm 2 x 400 or 4 x 240 mm
2 2
115 x 305 HR831 4 x 400 mm 2 x 400 or 4 x 240 mm
2 2
150 x 350 HR832 4 x 400 mm 2 x 400 or 4 x 240 mm
C.36
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 88
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 89
BS 1361 HRC fuse carriers

& fuse / HRC fuse carriers C39
HRC cartridge fuse gG/aM type C40
L51-L58 HRC fuse carries

and switchfusez C41
motor starters C42
photovoltaic fuse carriers, SPD

and switch disconnectors C44
surge protective devices type 2 C45
surge protective devices for

general protection C46
replacement cartridges for SPDs

with plug in cartridge C46
monobloc surge protection devices C47
surge protective devices with low

voltage protection level C48
surge protective devices for

telephone lines C48
modular switches disconnectors/ isolating switch,

auxiliaries and accessories C53
modular changeover switches C54
enclosed fuse combination

switches 32-630A C57
enclosed load break switches

20-1600A C58
control relays C60

2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 90
BS 1361 HRC fuse carriers and fuse
Description Technical data : - short-circuit rating : 16.5kA

Protection and control of circuits - Fuse carriers suitable for fuses (i.e. no further consideration of
against overloads and short which fully comply with the fault levels is necessary)
circuits : dimensional, power loss, - colour coded ratings
- In domestic installations fusing factor, discrimination - connection capacities :
- In commercial and light and time current top : cable + busbar
Industrial electrical distribution characteristics of BS 136. Rigid conductor 16mm2
systems Complies with BS1361:1971: Flexible conductor 10mm2
Designation Current Colour Width in ❚ Pack. Cat. Ref.

rating (Amps) 17.5mm qty.
Fuse carriers 5A - 240V White 1 12 LB113
15A - 240V Blue 1 12 LB115
20A - 240V Yellow 1 12 LB116
30A - 240V Red 1 12 LB118
BS 1361 HRC 5A (23 x 6.35 x 4.8mm) White 50 L153

Spare cartridge fuses
(suitable only for L11x carriers) 15A (26 x 10.32 x 6.4mm) Blue 50 L155
20A (26 x 10.32 x 6.4mm) Yellow 50 L156
30A (29 x 12.7 x 8mm) Red 50 L158
HRC fuse carriers

Fuse carrier 32 Amps max. - Fusing factor : class Q1
Protection and control of circuits - Rated breaking capacities;
against overloads and 80kA at 415 V a.c.
Short-circuit : 40kA at 250 V d.c.
- In single or three phase - Complies with
subcircuits IEC 60 269-2, 2-1
- Suitable for fuses which - For spare cartridge fuses
comply with IEC 269 10.3 x 38mm
- Rating voltage : 415 V a.c.
250 V d.c.
Designation Description Width in ❚ Pack. Cat. Ref.

17.5mm qty.
Fuse carriers 1P 1 12 LS501

For cylindrical cartridge
fuses 10.3 x 38mm 1P + N 2 12 LS512
(supplied without fuse)
2P 2 6 LS502
3P 3 6 LS503
3P + N 4 3 LS504
1P with indicating light 1 12 LS531

LS501
C.39
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 91
HRC cartridge fuse gG & aM type
Description (gG type) Description (aM type) Sizes:

Cylindrical gG fuse-links are Cylindrical gG fuse-links are L38: 10 x 38
intended for industrial applications. intended for industrial applications. L51: 14 x 51
L58: 22 x 58
gG protection for general purpose aM protection for motor protection
applications against overload applications against short-circuits. Comply with IEC 60 269-1 and
and short-circuits. 60 269-2
Designation Voltage In Cat. Ref. Cat. Ref.

gG type aM type
Cartridge fuses 500V AC 0.5A LF300G LG300M

type gG/ aM 1A LF301G LG301M
10 x 38 mm 2A LF302G LG302M
breaking capacity: 120kA 4A LF304G LG304M
6A LF306G LG306M
8A LF308G LG308M
10A LF310G LG310M
LF302G LF302M 12A LF312G LG312M
16A LF316G LG316M
20A LF320G LG320M
25A LF325G LG325M
400V AC 20A / LG320M

25A / LG325M
32A LF332G LG332M
Cartridge fuses 690V AC 2A LF402G LG402M

14 x 51 mm 6A LF406G LG406M
breaking capacity: 8A LF408G LG408M
2 to 25A: 80kA 10A LF410G LG410M
32 to 50A: 120kA 12A LF412G LG412M
16A LF416G LG416M
20A LF420G LG420M
25A LF425G LG425M
LF425G LF432M
500V AC 32A LF432G LG432M
40A LF440G LG440M
45A LF445G LG445M
Cartridge fuses 690V AC 16A LF516G LG516M

22 x 58 mm 25A LF525G LG525M
breaking capacity: 32A LF532G LG532M
16 to 63A: 80kA 40A LF540G LG540M
80 to 125A: 120kA 50A LF550G LG550M
63A LF563G LG563M

100A LF590G LG590M
LF563G LF563M
400V AC 125A LF599G LG599M
C.40
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 92
L51 - L58 HRC fuse carriers
Fuse carriers L 51 Fuse carriers L 58 Can be padlocked in the off

For spare cartridge fuses For cylindrical cartridge fuses position
14 x 51mm 22 x 58mm
50A 690V 125A 690V
Complies with IEC 60 947-3 Complies with IEC 60 947-3
Connection capacity : Connection capacity :

35mm2 rigid cable 50mm2 rigid cable
25mm2 flexible cable 35mm2 flexible cable

17.5mm qty.
L51 fuse carrier 1 phase 1.5 10 LR601
2 phases 3 5 LR602
3 phases 4.5 3 LR603
3 phases + neutral 6 2 LR604
LR601
L58 fuse carrier 1 phase 2 6 LR701
2 phases 4 3 LR702
3 phases 6 2 LR703
LR703
switchfuse
Designation Description Width in ❚ Pack Cat.Ref.
17.5mm qty.
32A 1 pole + neutral 1.5 12 LC732
63A 1 pole 1.5 12 LC163
63A 1 pole + neutral 3 6 LC563
32A 3 pole 4.5 4 LC332
63A 3 pole 4.5 4 LC363
63A 3 pole + neutral 6 3 LC363N

LC563
C.41
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 93
motor starters
Description Conform to : Options :

To ensure localised control and IEC 60 947-1, IEC 60 947-2 Undervoltage release :
protection of single and three MZ528N, MZ529N
phase motors. All motor starters Note :
have thermal and adjustable Please consult us for enclosure Auxiliary contacts :
magnetic trip. selection MZ520N, MZ527N
Technical data : Alarm contact :

- Adjustable thermal relay MZ527N
- AC3 utilisation category
Connection capacity
2 conductors
Max size 1 to 4mm2 flexible
1.5 tomm2 6 rigid
Designation Current Standard power Rating of 3 phase Width in ❚ Pack Cat. Ref.
setting motor 50/60Hz (AC3 category) 17.5mm qty. type B
230V (kW) 400V (kW)
Motor starters 0.1 - 0.16A - - - 1 MM501N
0.16 - 0.24A - 0.06 2.5 1 MM502N
0.24 - 0.4A 0.06 0.09 2.5 1 MM503N
0.4 - 0.6A 0.09 0.12 2.5 1 MM504N
0.6 - 1.0A 0.12 0.25 2.5 1 MM505N
1.0 - 1.6A 0.25 0.55 2.5 1 MM506N
MM501N
1.6 - 2.4A 0.55 0.8 2.5 1 MM507N
2.4 - 4.0A 0.8 1.5 2.5 1 MM508N
4.0 - 6.0A 1.5 2.5 2.5 1 MM509N
6.0 - 10A 2.5 4.0 2.5 1 MM510N
10 - 16A 4.0 7.5 2.5 1 MM511N
16 - 20A 5.5 9.0 2.5 1 MM512N
20 - 25A 5.5 12.5 2.5 1 MM513N
MZ520N
Auxiliary contacts 1C + 1O 2A - 400V~ 0.5 1 MZ520N
(act as an indicating 3.5A - 230V~
control device to monitor
the ON or OFF position)
Alarm contacts 1C 2A - 400V~ 1 MZ527N

(mounted inside the 3,5A - 230V~
motor starter)
Under voltage release 230V~ 50Hz 1 MZ528N

(to prevent automatic
MZ527N restarting of the 400V~ 50Hz 1 MZ529N
controlled device)
Surface mounting enclosure weatherproof IP55 1 MZ521N

removable window
w78 x h150 x d95mm
Emergency stop button 1 MZ530N

IP65, mounted on surface
mounting enclosure MZ521N
MZ521N
C.42
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 94
technical information motor starters
230V 400V 230/400V

Technical specifications
+ spare cartridge
Electrical characteristics fuses aM/gl
- Electrical supply : 230/400V
- Ambient temperature range : 25°C to +55°C MM501N 150kA 150kA 150kA
- Working life : 100 000 operations AC-3 MM502N
- Maximum of 40 operations/hour MM503N
- Tropicalized for all climates MM504N
- Connection with clamp type, terminals connection capacity : MM505N
2 2
Flexible : 1.0 mm to 4 mm
2 2 MM506N
Rigid : 1.5 mm to 3 mm
MM507N
MM508N
MM509N
Electrical connection single phase MM510N

Ph MM511N 50kA 50kA 50kA
N MM512N
MM513N
Nominal breaking capacity > short circuit current : fuses are not
necessary, if nominal breaking capacity < short circuit current : fuses
must be used, breaking capacity of association is 80kA (with BS 88
fuses)
M
2
Time/current characteristics Under voltage release (no volt coil)

7200
1200
MZ528 N MZ529N
600
230V~ 400V~
300
120 Auxiliary contact (mounted inside starter)

60
40
➝
20
MZ520N
time in seconds
10
2A - 400V~
5
3.5A - 230V~
2
Alarm contact (mounted inside starter)
1
MZ527N
0, 2 2A - 400V~
3,5A - 230V~
0, 05
0, 02
0, 005
0, 002
1 1, 5 2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20 30
multiples of In ➝ 14
2 1
1
OFF
Clic ! Clic !
3 2
C.43
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 95
photovoltaic fuse carriers, SPD

and switch disconnectors
Photovoltaic fuse and fuses - minimum interrupting: Switch disconnectors Connection capacity
DC protection of photovoltaic 2 x In (2-3-4A), Designed for photovoltaic appli- rigid conductors: 16
strings against overload and 1.9 x In (6-8-10-12A), cation but fully compatible to flexible conductors: 10
short-circuits. 1.6 x In (16-20A) any DC purposes.
Contact making and break inde- Comply IEC 60 947-3
Technical data Connection capacity pendent to operator speed.
- sizes: L38 (10 x 38) rigid conductors: 16
- class of operation: flexible conductors: 10 Technical data
gPV (PV fuse) - poles: 4P
- poles: 1P, 2P Comply with IEC 60269-2, IEC - voltage rating: 1000V DC 21B
- voltage rating: 1000V DC for 60269-2-1 and IEC 60947-3 - current rating: 32A
fuse carriers and 900V DC for
fuses
- fuse carriers current rating:
32A
- fuses current rating: 1 to 32A
- breaking capacity: 30kA
Designation In (A) Characteristics Pack Cat. Ref.

qty.
L38 photovoltaic fuse carriers 32 single pole 12 L501PV

1000V DC
32 double pole 12 L502PV
L38 photovoltaic fuse cartridge 1 10 LF301PV

900V DC
2 10 LF302PV
3 10 LF303PV
4 10 LF304PV
5 10 LF305PV
6 10 LF306PV
8 10 LF308PV
L501PV 10 10 LF310PV
12 10 LF312PV
15 10 LF315PV
16 10 LF316PV
20 10 LF320PV
25 10 LF325PV
32 10 LF332PV
DC switch disconnectors 32 4 poles, 1000 V DC 1 SB432PV
SB432PV
Double pole polarized 25kA, 4kAV, class 2 SPV325

surge protection devices with end of life indicator
photovoltaic Ucpv ≤ 1000V DC
SPV325
C.44
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 96
surge protective devices type 2
SPDs with plug in cartridge with Common characteristics : For remote signalling, an auxilia- For auxiliary contact :
very high, high and medium dis- SPDs with base and cartridges. ry contact (R version) is used to - 0.5mm2 mini
charge current capacity Available in 2 versions : report the information of condi- - 1.5mm2 maxi
(65 kA, 40 kA and 15 kA). - SPDs with base and plug in tion indication until the end of
cartridges with an end of life life of the product. - Degree of protection : IP 203
SPDs with plug in cartridge indication LED (in enclosure).
ensure : - SPDs with base and auxiliary The cartridge allows simple
- General protection of electrical contact for remote signallings replacement without the need to
or electronic equipment, and plug in cartridges with cut-off the power supply
- Protection in common and reserve protection indicator . - SPDs are equipped with
differential mode for domestic, integrated thermic and
industrial and commercial This version, with reserve indica- dynamic disconnection
buildings. tor, shows the intermediary
state, with indication of the need - Connection capacity of
to change the cartridge before terminal blocks, (L, N/E) :
disconnection, but keeps the - 25mm2 flexible conductor,
maximal protection capacity till - 35mm2 rigid conductor
the end.
Designation Characteristics Width in ❚ Cat. Ref.

17.5mm
SPDs with plug in cartridge

1 pole 1 SPN165R
I max. 65kA with reserve indicator and remote
signalling
Un :230/400 V 50/60 Hz Up : 1.5 kV at In
SPN265R 2 poles 1 Ph + N 2 SPN265R

I max. 65kA with reserve indicator and remote
signalling
Un: 230/400 V 50/60 Hz Up : 1.3 kV at In
4 poles 3 Ph + N 4 SPN465R
with reserve indicator and remote
signalling
Up : 1.5 kV at In
SPN465R
C.45
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 97
surge protective devices for general protection

17.5mm
SPDs with plug in cartridge - Single pole 1 Ph 1 SPN140C

Up : 2 kV at In
I max. 40 kA - Single pole 1 Ph 1 SPD140D

Un :230/400 V 50/60 Hz Up : 1.2 kV at In
- 2 poles 1 Ph + N 2 SPN240R
with reserve indicator and
remote signalling
Up : 1.2 kV at In
- 2 poles 1 Ph + N 2 SPD240D
Up : 1.2 kV at In
SPN240R - 4 poles 3 Ph + N 4 SPN440R

remote signalling
Up : 1.2 kV at In
Up : 1.2 kV at In
SPDs with plug in cartridge - 2 poles 1 Ph + N 2 SPN215R

remote signalling
I max. 15 kA Up : 1.0 kV at In
Un: 230/400 V 50/60 Hz
Up : 1.0 kV at In
- 4 poles 3 Ph + N 4 SPN415R
SPD415D with reserve indicator and
remote signalling
Up : 1.0 kV at In
Up : 1.0 kV at In
replacement cartridges for SPDs

with plug in cartridge
Replacement cartridges Cartridges are available for all A keying system exists to
The cartridge allows simple discharge currents (65 kA, 40kA, prevent a line cartridge being
replacement without the need 15kA) with or without reserve interchanged by mistake with
to cut-off the power supply. protection indication. a neutral and vice versa
Designation Characteristics Cat Ref..
Replacement cartridges Phase for : SPN265R, SPN465R SPN065R
SPN140C SPN040C
SPN240R, SPN440R SPN040R
SPD140D, SPD240D, SPD440D SPD040D
SPN215R, SPN415R SPN015R
SPN065R SPD215D, SPD415D SPD015D
Remark : Neutral for: SPN 265R, SPN465R, SPN065N

For a replacement of cartridges,
choose only the same reference SPN240R, SPN440R, SPN040N
as the previous cartridge. SPN215R, SPN415R
SPDxxxD SPD040N
Cartridge for photovoltaic polarized +/- for SPV325 SPV025

SPDs
Ucpv ≤ 1000V DC earth for SPV325 SPV025E
SPN065N
C.46
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 98
monobloc surge protection devices
Description Connection capacity:

Thanks to these characteristics, - 25mm2 flexible cables
the new range of monobloc - 35mm2 rigid cables
SPDs is particulary adapted for
the residential and commercial SPDs are approved according to
application. IEC/EN 61643
These SPDs can ensure the
main protection of equipment
and ensure the main protection
of equipment and ensure both
common and differential mode.
The end of life protection is
ensured by a thermal disconnec-
tor and clearly indicates with a
visual indiaction window.

17.5mm qty
Monobloc SPDs 1 Ph+N 2 1 SPM265E

Imax = 65kA In = 35kA
Un = 230 / 400V ~ Up = 1.8V to In
3 Ph + N 4 1 SPM465E
In = 35kA
Up = 1.8V to In
SPM240E

Un = 230 / 400V ~ Up = 1.5V to In
3 Ph + N 4 1 SPM440E
In = 20kA
Up = 1.5V to In

Un = 230 / 400V ~ Up = 1.3V to In
SPM440E
3 Ph + N 4 1 SPM420E
In = 10kA
Up = 1.3V to In
C.47
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 99
surge protective devices

with low voltage protection level
SPDs with low voltage Optimal coordination is obtained Discharge current : Connection capacity :
protection level when cascaded with a main I max. 8 kA (8/20 wave). - 6mm2 flexible conductor
protection device (lower Up see - 10mm2 rigid conductor .
To protect very sensitive table below) A green LED on the front face
electronic equipment. Protection is assured in both indicates the status of the SPD Degree of protection : IP 20
The fine protection complements common and differential modes. connected in series with the (in enclosure).
the main protection and can equipment that needs to be
protect 1 or several electronic protected. Complies with
devices. Connected in series with the NF EN 61-643-11
equipment that needs to be September 2002
protected.
Suitable for every earthing system.

17.5mm
SPD
With low voltage protection level 2 poles 1 Ph + N 2 SPN208
With low voltage protection level 2 poles 1 Ph + N 2 SPN208S
SPN208S
Un :230/400 V 50/60 Hz 4 poles 3 Ph + N 3 SPN408S
Up (Ph/ N/) : 1,2 kV at In

Up (Ph/N) : 1 kV at In
Voltage protection level with a

main + fine protection :
Up 800 V
SPN408S
surge protective devices for telephone lines

SPDs for telephone lines. In-line connection on telephone Discharge current : Degree of protection :
For the protection of receiver line with receiver to be protec- I max 10 kA (8/20 wave). IP 10 (in enclosure).
against transient current surge ted. Complies with
vehicled by telephone lines (fax, Connection capacity IEC 61643-21
modem, etc...) - 0.5 to 2.5mm2
Protection is assured in both flexible conductor
common and differential modes - 0.5 to 2.5mm2 rigid conductor

17.5mm
Voltage surge protection for Un : 130 V 1 SPN505

analog telephone lines Up : 600 V
Voltage surge protection for Un : 40 V 1 SPN504

digital telephone lines Up : 600 V
SPN504
C.48
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 4/9/12 2:19 PM Page 100
SPDs
Installation example
D. B.
500 mA
S F
telephone line
L1
C1 32 A max.
SPN 208S SPN 504

SPN 408S SPN 505
General SPD
with plug on
cartridge
Sensitive equipment Very sensitive equipment class I or class II
Some installation rules for SPDs Note. : When SPD is fitted downstream of RCD, the system should
- General SPD protects the whole installation by diverting the preferably be selective (with time delay) to avoid nuisance tripping.
lightning current to the earth. Fitted in directly dowstream the type
S differential function or delayed for system TT and TN-S.
- The cable length L1 must be reduced to less than 0,5m
- The resistance of the earth connection must be weakest possible
(approx. 10 ) and only one is requested by installation,
- SPDs SPN 208 and SPN 408S protect very sensitive devices of
class I and class II.
- A cable length of at least 1m is requested between general and
secondary SPD to ensure a minimum impedance in order to avoid
the simultaneous bringing into conduction of both SPDs,
- SPDs SPN 504 and SPN 505 protect analog or digital telephone
lines from very sensitive receivers.
Choice of disconnection device Distressing of SPD
Successive discharging of current due to lightning reduces

The chosen device is an MCB progressively the performance of SPD’s, with the consequence of a
possible short circuit for the installation.
For this reason, all our SPDs are fitted with an automatic thermal and
Selection chart for disconnection device according to the SPD type dynamic disconnection device LED on front indicates the good
working of the device :
- For normal version :
General SPD C1 (1) Green = OK Red = replacement
- For version with reserve indicator :
Green = OK Yellow = caution Red = replacement
SPN 165P 32 A curve C - For version with electric LED for SPDs for fine protection
SPN 265R Green = OK LED off = replacement
SPN 465R
SPN 140C - SPD 140D 32 A curve C
SPN 240R - SPD 240D
SPN 440R - SPD 440D Warranty
SPN 215R - SPD 215D 32 A curve C Warranty can not be applied for SPDs as their life expectancy
depends on the perturbation level absorbed to protect the electric
SPN 415R - SPD 415D
installation.
(1) The breaking capacity of MCB must be choosen according to the

short circuit intensity at the head of the installation and according to
the number of poles (1,2 or 4)
C.49
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 101
SPDs with plug in cartridge Keying system for fitting of neutral and phase cartridge
Presentation of 1 pole and multi pole SPDs : Neutral plug in cartridges can not be fitted in slots for phase
Available in two versions : cartridges and visa versa
- Base with an auxiliay contact and cartridges with reserve indicator
- Base without auxiliary contact and cartridges with end of life LED
On the front of the cartridge, a mechanical LED indicates the state of

SPD
Auxiliary contact
With reserve indicator
Base
End of live LED
Reserve
indicator
End of life
LED
Plug in
cartrige
OK
Auxiliary contact for signalling and remote monitoring

12 14 11
12 14 11
2
0,5 mm
Auxiliary contact mini 2
1.5 mm
connection capacity maxi
Remote signalling voltage 230 V 250 V ...
ominal current 1A 0,1 A
12 14 11
2 poles or
4 poles base
Connection diagrams Multi pole SPDs : SPN2xx - SPN4xx - SPD2xx - SPD4xx

Single pole SPDs : SPN1xx - SPD1xx protection is assured in both common and differential modes without adding
Protection only in common mode devices L1
L2
IT / TN-C TT / TN-S
L1 L3
N
L2 N L
L3
L
d1
d1
d1 ≤ 50 cm
d1 + d2 ≤ 50 cm
PE
PE
d2
PEN PEN
C.50
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 102
Technical characteristics of single pole SPDs
References SPN140C SPD140D

Installation exposure level (risk) medium medium
Installation of SPDs in parallel in parallel
Nominal voltage Un 230 V 230 V
frenquency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Max. continuous operating voltage Uc 440 V 275 V
Voltage protection level Up 2 kV 1,2 kV
Discharge current capacity nominal current In 15 kA 15 kA
8/20 s wave max. current Imax 40 kA 40 kA
Degree of protection IP 20 IP 20
Short circuit resistance Icc (MCB - curve C) 20 kA - 32 A 20 kA - 32 A
Temperature working -20°C to +60°C -20°C to +60°C
storage -40°C to +70°C -40°C to +70°C
End of live LED yes yes
Reserve indicator + auxiliary contact - -
Domestic building collective/individual yes yes
industrial/commercial yes yes
Earthing systems IT, TN-C IT, TN-C
2
2
Max. connection capacity flexible 25 mm2 25 mm
2
(Ph, N, E) rigid 35 mm 35 mm
screw head PZ2 PZ2
Technical characteristics of multipole SPDs

SPN265R - SPN465R SPN240R, SPN440R SPN215R, SPN415R
References
SPD240D, SPD440D SPD215D, SPD415D
Installation exposure level (risk) very high medium low

Installation of SPDs in parallel in parallel in parallel
Nominal voltage Un 230/400 V 230/400 V 230/400 V
frenquency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Max. continuous operating voltage Uc between Phase / Neutral 255 V 255 V 255 V
between Neutre / PE 275 V 275 V 275 V
Protection mode common yes yes yes
differential yes yes yes
Voltage protection level Up 1,5 kV 1,2 kV 1,0 kV
Discharge current capacity nominal current In 20 kA 15 kA 5 kA
8/20 μs wave maxial current Imax 65 kA 40 kA 15 kA
Degree of protection IP 20
Short circuit resistance Icc (MCB - curve C) 20 kA - 32 A 20 kA - 32 A 10 kA - 32 A
Working temperature -40°C à +60°C
End of life LED - SPN 240D - SPN 440D SPN 215D - SPN 415D
Reserve indicator + auxiliary contact SPN 265R - SPN 465R SPN 240R - SPN 440R SPN 215R - SPN 415R
Domestic buildings collective / individual yes
industrial / commercial yes
Earthing systems TT TT TT
TN - S TN - S TN - S
2
Connection capacity flexible 25 mm
2
(Ph, N, E) rigid 35 mm
Screw head PZ2
C.51
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 103
Technical characteristics of secondary SPDs (fine protection)
References SPN208 SPN408S

Installation exposure level (risk) low low
Installation of SPDs in parallel in parallel
Nominal voltage Un 230 V 230/400 V
frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Max. continuous operating voltage Uc between N / PE 255 V 255 V
between Phase and Neutral 255 V 255 V
Protection mode common yes yes
differential yes yes
Voltage protection level Up 1,5 kV 1,0 kV
Discharge current capacity nominal current In 2 kA 2 kA
8/20 μs wave maximal current Imax 8 kA 8 kA
Degree of protection IP 20 IP 20
Short ciruit resistance Icc (with fuse or associated MCB) 6 kA - 16 A 6 kA - 32 A
Temperature working -25°C to +40°C -25°C to +40°C
storage -25°C to +60°C -25°C to +40°C
Well functioning indicator green LED green LED
Domestic buildings collective / individual yes yes
industrial / commercial yes yes
Earthing systems TT, IT, TT, IT,
TN - S TN - S
2 2
Connection capacity flexible min./max. 2,5/6 mm 2,5/6 mm
2 2
(Ph, N, E) rigid min./max. 6/10 mm 6/10 mm
Screw head PZ1
SPDs SPN 208S and SPN 408S

N L
25 A ( max)
SP208S
N L
N L N L1 L2 L3 Coordination : between main SPD and secondary level SPDs, this

coordination allows to reduce the protection level Up to < 800 V
32 A
25 A ( max)
N L
N L1 L2 L3 OK 25 A ( max)
SPN 408S
SP208S
C.52
C.52
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 104
modular switch disconnectors / isolating switch
Description Technical data : In: 50A to 125A

For use as a switch disconnec- Utilisation category AC22A Connection capacity:
tor in all types of AC circuits. 230V/ 400V 50mm2 -rigid conductor
Complies with: In: 16A to 32A 35mm2 -flexible conductor
IEC 60943-3 Connection capacity:
10mm2 -rigid conductor Approvals
Features: 6mm2 -flexible conductor
All switches have a green/ red
indication on the toggie, giving In: 32A to 63A
positive contact indication. Connection capacity:
Switches with LED indicator - 25mm2 -rigid conductor
please contact us. 16mm2 -flexible conductor

17.5mm qty.
Single pole 1 x 16A 230V~ 1 12 SBN116

1 x 25A 230V~ 1 12 SBN125
1 x 32A 230V~ 1 12 SBN132
1 x 40A 230V~ 1 12 SBN140
1 x 63A 230V~ 1 12 SBN163
1 x 80A 230V~ 1 12 SBN180
1 x 100A 230V~ 1 12 SBN190
1 x 125A 230V~ 1 12 SBN199
SBN125
Double pole 2 x 16A 400V~ 1 12 SBN216

2 x 25A 400V~ 1 12 SBN225
2 x 32A 400V~ 1 12 SBN232
2 x 32A (2-mod) 400V~ 2 6 SBN233
2 x 40A 400V~ 2 6 SBN240
2 x 63A 400V~ 2 6 SBN263
2 x 80A 400V~ 2 6 SBN280
2 x 100A 400V~ 2 6 SBN290
2 x 125A 400V~ 2 6 SBN299
SBN225
Triple pole 3 x 16A 400V~ 2 6 SBN316

3 x 25A 400V~ 2 6 SBN325
3 x 32A 400V~ 2 6 SBN332
3 x 32A (3-mod) 400V~ 3 4 SBN333
3 x 40A 400V~ 3 4 SBN340
3 x 63A 400V~ 3 4 SBN363
3 x 80A 400V~ 3 4 SBN380
3 x 100A 400V~ 3 4 SBN390
3 x 125A 400V~ 3 4 SBN399
SBN325
Four pole 4 x 16A 400V~ 2 6 SBN416

4 x 25A 400V~ 2 6 SBN425
4 x 32A 400V~ 2 6 SBN432
4 x 32A (4-mod) 400V~ 4 3 SBN433
4 x 40A 400V~ 4 3 SBN440
4 x 63A 400V~ 4 3 SBN463
4 x 80A 400V~ 4 3 SBN480
4 x 100A 400V~ 4 3 SBN490
4 x 125A 400V~ 4 3 SBN499
SBN425 * available in Q2 2013
auxiliaries and accessories

17.5mm qty.
Auxiliary contact 1NO+1NC 6A - 230V~ 1/2 1 ESC080

Compatible with disconnector swithces from 16 to 125A
Terminal shroud to shroud the connectio terminal 4 MZN120

and screws
The screw cover can be sealed
Compatible with switch disconnector 32 to 63A frame size 2
Only for shroudling the terninal screw with switch disconnector 63A to 125A frame size 3
ESC080
Phase barrier shield 3 MZN121
MZN175 Padlocking kit 2 MZN175
* available in Q2 2013
C.53
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 105
modular changeover switches
Description Technical data : In: 32A to 63A

For use as a changeover switch Utilisation category AC22A Connection capacity:
in all types of circuits between 2 230V/ 400V 25mm2 -rigid conductor
AC sources. In: 16A to 32A 16mm2 -flexible conductor
Complies with: Connection capacity:
IEC 60943-3 10mm2 -rigid conductor Approvals
6mm2 -flexible conductor
Designation Characteristics Width in ❚ Pack Cat.Ref.

17.5mm qty.
Centre off changeover switch

and common point on top
Single pole 1 x 25A 230V~ 1 12 SFT125
Double pole 2 x 25A 230V~ 2 6 SFT225

SFT440
Triple pole 3 x 40A 400V~ 3 4 SFT340
Four pole 4 x 40A 230V~ 4 3 SFT440
Centre off changeover switch

and common point on bottom
Double pole 2 x 63A 230V~ 4 3 SF263
Four pole 4 x 63A 230V~ 8 1 SF463
2-way changeover switch and

SF263
common point on top
Single pole 1 x 25A 230V~ 1 12 SFH125

Single pole 1 x 32A 230V~ 1 12 SFH132
Double pole 2 x 25A 230V~ 2 6 SFH225

Double pole 2 x 32A 230V~ 2 6 SFH232
2-way changeover switch
1NO + 1NC 1 x 25A 230V~ 1 12 SFM125
1NO + 1NC 1 x 32A 230V~ 1 12 SFM132

SFH125
* available in Q2 2013
C.54
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 106
Enclosed fuse combination

switches and switch disconnectors
The advantages for you : Technical data :

• Easy to install • Standard IEC 60947-3
• Positives action door handle • Robust 1.2mm steel enclosure
• Lockable off
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 107
Expert
tips
1 5
Knock outs and Neutral bar
removable gland plate
2.0mm (up to 400A)
2.5mm (up to 630A - 800A)
2 6
Robust 1.2mm steel Top or bottom fed
enclosure
3 7
Terminal cover Accepts BS88 fuses
4 8
Lockable off Key hole mounting slots
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 108
enclosed fuse combination switches 32-630A
Description handle is also padlockable in the Range: Cable capacity

The Hager range of fuse off position. SPSN 20-200A (4 ratings) 20A = 16mm2
combination switches has been TPN 20-800A (12 ratings) 32A = 16mm2
designed to provide individual All versions will accept standard TPSN 20-800A (12 ratings) 63A = 25mm2
protection and control of BS88 fuse links and can be IP41 100A = 95mm2
individual circuits. converted to switch 125A = 95mm2
The enclosures up to 200A have disconnector by fitting copper 160A = 95mm2
been designed to provide links. Note: 200A = 240mm2
adequate cabling space without Maximum rated fuse links are fit- 250A = 240mm2
the need for additional cable Utilisation category ted in all fuse combination 315A = 240mm2
spreader boxes. AC23 A/B switches 400A = 240mm2
Operation of the device is Icc : 50kA 630A = 300mm2 x 2
through a door mounted rotary 800A = 300mm2 x 2
handle which is mechanically Complies with:
interlocked to prevent access to BS EN 60-439 part 1 (enclosure)
live conductors when the switch BS EN 60-947 part 3 (device)
is in the on position. The
Designation In Pack Cat. Ref.

A Qty.
Enclosed FCS 20A 1 JFB202S

Single pole switched neutral 32A 1 JFB203S
63A 1 JFD206S
100A 1 JFE210S
Triple pole & neutral 20A 1 JFB302S

32A 1 JFB303S
63A 1 JFD306S
100A 1 JFE310S
125A 1 JFG312S
160A 1 JFG316S
200A 1 JFG320S
250A 1 JFG325S
315A 1 JFH331S
400A 1 JFH340S
630A 1 JFI 363S
JFG416 800A 1 JFI 380S
Triple pole switched neutral 20A 1 JFB402S

32A 1 JFB403S
63A 1 JFD406S
100A 1 JFE410S
125A 1 JFG412S
160A 1 JFG416S
200A 1 JFG420S
250A 1 JFG425S
315A 1 JFH431S
400A 1 JFH440S
630A 1 JFI 463S
800A 1 JFI 480S
Cable extension boxes For 125A/160A /200A 1 JZA701

triple pole & triple pole + For 315A /400A FCS 1 JZA702
JFG425
switched neutral For 630A / 800A FCS 1 JZA703
Auxiliary contact
1AC type NO 1 HZF301
1AC type NC 1 HZF302
Terminal cover 2P 3P 4P
100A HZF201 HZF202 HZF203
125A, 160A HZF202 HZF203
200A to 400A HZF204 HZF205
630A to 800A HZF206 HZF207
C.57
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 109
enclosed load break switches 20-1600A
Description Operation of the device is Complies with:

The Hager range of switch through a door mounted rotary BS EN 60-439 part 1 (enclosure) Cable capacity
disconnector has been designed handle which is mechanically BS EN 60-947 part 3 (device). 20A = 16mm2
to provide individual protection interlocked to prevent access to IP41 / IP55 32A = 16mm2
and control of individual circuits live conductors when the switch 63A = 50mm2
up to 1600A. is in the “On” position. The 100A = 50mm2
handle is also padlockable in the 125A = 95mm2
The enclosures have been “Off” position. 160A = 95mm2
designed to provide adequate 200A = 95mm2
cabling space without the need Utilisation category 250A = 185mm2
for additional cable spreader AC23A 315A = 185mm2
boxes. AC22A/B 400A = 240mm2
630A = 300mm2
800A = 185mm2 x 2
1250A = 185mm2 x 4
Designation In A Pack Cat. Ref. Cat. Ref.

Enclosed LBS qty. TP & N TP & SW N
IP41 20A 1 JAB302S JAB402S

32A 1 JAB303S JAB403S
160A 1 JAC316S JAC416S
200A 1 JAE320S JAE420S
250A 1 JAE325S JAE425S
315A 1 JAG331S JAG431S
400A 1 JAG340S JAG440S
630A 1 JAH363S JAH463S
800A 1 JAH380S JAH480S
JAB302 1250A 1 JAH390S JAH490S
1600A 1 JAH392S JAH492S
IP55 63A 1 JAB306S-IP55 JAB406S-IP55

100A 1 JAB310S-IP55 JAB410S-IP55
160A 1 JAC316S-IP55 JAC416S-IP55
200A 1 JAE320S-IP55 JAE420S-IP55
250A 1 JAE325S-IP55 JAE425S-IP55
315A 1 JAG331S-IP55 JAG431S-IP55
400A 1 JAG340S-IP55 JAG440S-IP55
630A 1 JAH363S-IP55 JAH463S-IP55
JAG440 Cable extension boxes 125A, 160A 1 / JZA700

for IP41 LBS 200A, 250A, 315A, 400A 1 / JZA701
630A, 800A 1 / JZA702
Auxiliary contact 20A to 100A 1 / HZ021

125A to 800A 1 / HZ023
Terminal cover 3P 4P
125A to 200A HZC201 HZC202
250A to 400A HZC203 HZC204
630A HZC205 HZC206
800A HZ036 HZ046
JAE320S-IP55
C.58
101132 SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 9/12/12 9:40 AM Page 110
enclosed load break switches 20-1600A
C B D
E1
F F1
Cat.Ref Cat.Ref A B C D E E1 F F1
JAB302S JAB402S 250 105 180 177 110 / 172 /
JAB303S JAB403S 250 105 180 177 110 / 172 /
JAB306S JAB406S 250 105 180 177 110 / 172 /
JAB310S JAB410S 250 150 180 177 130 / 172 /
JAC316S JAC416S 300 150 250 232 140 / 192 /
JAE320S JAE420S 400 200 375 357 265 / 292 /
JAE325S JAE425S 400 200 375 357 265 / 292 /
JAG331S JAG431S 500 200 375 357 265 / 380 /
JAG340S JAG440S 500 200 375 357 265 / 380 /
JAH363S JAH463S 650 300 500 481.5 390 / 529 /
JAH380S JAH480S 650 300 500 481.5 390 / 529 /
JAH390S JAH490S 1050 300 750 747 640 / 937 /
JAH392S JAH492S 1050 300 750 747 640 / 937 /
Cat.Ref Cat.Ref A B C D E E1 F F1
JAB306S-IP55 JAB406S-IP55 300 200 300 300 / 330 / 195
JAB310S-IP55 JAB410S-IP55 300 200 300 300 / 330 / 195
JAC316S-IP55 JAC416S-IP55 400 200 300 300 / 330 / 295
JAE320S-IP55 JAE420S-IP55 600 250 400 400 / 430 / 495
JAE325S-IP55 JAE425S-IP55 600 250 400 400 / 430 / 495
JAG331S-IP55 JAG431S-IP55 700 250 500 500 / 530 / 595
JAG340S-IP55 JAG440S-IP55 700 250 500 500 / 530 / 595
JAH363S-IP55 JAH463S-IP55 800 300 600 600 / 630 / 695
C.59
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 4/9/12 2:21 PM Page 111
control relays
Description EU102/301 EU103 The two digital control relays EU

Control relays are used in instal- Voltage control relay used to Current control relay used to 102 and EU 103 are equipped
lations where the current or the survey DC or AC voltage : survey DC or AC current : with an LCD indicator. During
voltage fluctuation may damage EU 102 single phase product to EU 103 single phase product to normal operation, the LCD dis-
equipments. monitor DC or AC monitor DC or AC current direct plays the measured voltage (EU
EU 302 three phase control relay via current transformer 102) or current (EU 103). The
The range is composed of mod- used to check AC voltage LCD and the local push buttons
ular devices : It surveys a current and closes a are also used to enter the
They survey a voltage and close contact as soon as the measure- parameter settings (type of sig-
EU100/101/301 contact as soon as the measurement is not ok. nal, monitored levels ... )
Voltage control relays dedicated ment is not ok.
to protect air conditioning equip- In case of an error, the relay will
ments : Phase control relay EU 300 to close a contact (changeover
EU100, EU101 single phase verify phase parameters (asym- contact 8A)
EU301 three phase metry, loss of phase, undervolt-
age)
They monitor the compressor
power supply and disconnect
the compressor when the volt-
age is faulty.

17.5mm qty.
Air conditioning control relay Power supply 230V AC 2 1 EU100

Single phase Under/over voltage control
Umin : 0,75 Un - Umax : 1,2 Un
Restart duration (5 or 10 minute)
selected via bridge
Output : changeover contact
8A AC1 250V~
Air conditioning control relay Power supply 230V AC 2 1 EU101

Single phase Under/over voltage control
EU100 Umin/Umax : +/-5% to +/-20% Un
defined via potentiometer
selected via switch
8A AC1 250V~
Air conditioning control relay Power supply Un 400V AC 2 1 EU301

Three phase Under/over voltage control
Umin/Umax : +/-5% to +/-20% Un
selected via switch
8A AC1 250V~
Phase control relay Power supply Un 400V AC 2 1 EU300

EU301 Under voltage control
Loss of phase, phase order control
Asymetry control : +/-5% to +/-20%
8A AC1 250V~
C.60
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 112
control relays
Voltage control relay Power supply 230V~ 50/60Hz 2 1 EU102

with LCD Voltage monitored DC 15 to 700V
or AC 15 to 480V~
Under or over voltage or both
control bands
Parameter setting via push button
and LCD indicator
8A AC 250V~
EU102
Voltage control relay Power supply Un 400V~ 50/60Hz 2 1 EU302
control relay Under/over voltage control
Umin/Umax : +/-5% to +/-20%
Un set via potentiometer
8A AC1 250V~
Current control relay Power supply Un 230V~ 50/60Hz 2 1 EU103

single phase with LCD Current control DC or AC,
direct 0.1A to 10A or via current
transformer
Under/ over current or
both control bands
Parameter setting via push button
and LCD indicator
8A AC1 250V~
C.61
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 31/8/12 11:34 AM Page 113
control relays
References EU100 EU101 EU301 EU302 EU300 EU102 EU103

Function single phase single phase three phase three phase phase voltage current
compressor compressor compressor voltage control relay control relay control relay
control relay control relay control relay control relay with LCD with LCD
LCD indicator No measured measured
votlage current
Power supply 230 V AC +10% -15% 230 V AC +10% -15% 230 V AC +10% -15%
50/60Hz +/-2% 50/60Hz +/-2% 50/60Hz +/-2%
Power consumption < 5 VA
Output contact 8A - AC1 - 250V
closed : normal status opened : default status
Disconnection time 5min / 10min -
Response time 200 ms 0,1..12s 200 ms 200 ms
set via
potentiometer
Monitoring function Monitoring function Monitor. funct. over voltage over current
over/under voltage under voltage under voltage under current
loss of phase band band
Monitoring levels Umin : Umin/Umax : Umin : Asymmetry DC : DC :
0.75Un +/-5% to +/-20%Un +/-5 to +/-5% 15V to 700V 0.1 to 10A
Umax : set via +/-20% Un to +/-20% AC : AC :
1.2Un potentiometer Umax : Umin : 0.70Un 15V rms direct : 0.1to10A or via
1.15Un to 480V rms current
transformer : X/5
Hysteresis 5 to 50%
Latching function No Yes No Yes
Supervised voltage the power supply
Width 2 modules 2 modules
LED power supply : lights when powered
green
LED default lights in case of fault, flashing during time elapses, off during normal status
information : red
LED asymmetry asymetry
information : yellow fault
Ik 3
IP rating IP 20
Working temperature -20 to +55°C
Storage temperature -40 to +70°C
Connexion flexible 0.75 to 4 mm2
rigid 1.00 to 6 mm2
Air conditioning control relay single phase EU100
L
N 1,2 Un
Un
0,75 Un
1 5 9
EU 100
2 4 6
t1 t1 t1 t1 t1
2 Def
2 Def
1 On
2 4 6 10 1 On
C.62
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 5/9/12 12:06 PM Page 114
control relays
Voltage control relay single phase EU102
Current control relay single phase EU103
Phase control relay EU300
C.63
2012_SEA_C01-64_2012_SEA_C01-60 5/9/12 12:06 PM Page 115
control relays
Air conditioning control relay single phase EU101
Air conditioning control relay three phase EU301
Voltage control relay three phase EU302
C.64
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 116
Energy & lighting control

comfort and efficiency
Energy and lighting control product range allows to optimise energy consumption while increasing comfort
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 117
latching relays D3
relays & interface relays D7
contactors D8
humfree contactors D10
override contactors D11
humfree override contactors D12
night & day contactors D13
auxiliaries for contactors and relays D14

2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 118
latching relays
Description The latching relays are built to Connection capacity

For the control of lighting add on optionally the following 10mm2 rigid cables
circuits in residential buildings, auxiliaries : 6mm2 flexible cables
small industry buildings and - an auxiliary for centralised
commercial buildings. ON/OFF control EPN 050 Conform to standard
Latching relays operates when - an auxiliary contact for IEC60669-1 and IEC60669-2-7
impulsed by a signal voltage. remote signalling EPN 051
The impulse can be provided via - an auxiliary for multi levelled
a pushbutton or switch. The first centralised control EPN 052
impulse sets the relay into its set - an auxiliary for control by
(opposite) state, the next maintained contact EPN 053
impulse returns it to its reset
(original) state.
Designation Type Coil Coil Power Width in ❚ Pack Cat. Ref.

VAC 50Hz VDC Circuit AC1 17.5mm qty.
Latching relays 1NO 230 110 16A-250V 1 12 EPN510
48 24 16A-250V 1 12 EPN501
A1 1
24 12 16A-250V 1 12 EPN513
A2 2
12 - 16A-250V 1 12 EPN511
8 - 16A-250V 1 12 EPN512
2NO 230 110 16A-250V 1 1 EPN520

A1 1 3
EPN510
110 48 16A-250V 1 1 EPN523
A2 2 4
48 24 16A-250V 1 1 EPN526
24 12 16A-250V 1 1 EPN524
12 - 16A-250V 1 1 EPN521
8 - 16A-250V 1 1 EPN522
A1 1 3
1NC+1NO 230 110 16A-250V 1 1 EPN515
110 48 16A-250V 1 1 EPN516

A2 2 4
48 24 16A-250V 1 1 EPN503
24 12 16A-250V 1 1 EPN518
12 - 16A-250V 1 1 EPN519
4NO 230 110 16A-400V 2 1 EPN540

A1 1 3 5 7
EPN540 48 24 16A-400V 2 1 EPN548

A2 2 4 6 8
24 12 16A-400V 2 1 EPN541
A1 1 3 5 7
2NC+2NO 230 110 16A-250V 2 1 EPN525
24 12 16A-250V 2 1 EPN528
A2 2 4 6 8
3NO+1NC 230 110 16A-400V 2 1 EPN546

A1 1 3 5 7
A2 2 4 6 8
D.3
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 119
latching relays auxiliaries
Auxiliaries for centralised control Auxiliary contact Connection latching relay + aux-
The EPN 050 allows the A remote signalling can be iliary
centralised control of several realised with the auxiliary Several auxiliaries can be
light sources which can be contact EPN 051. combined with the latching relay.
turned on or off simultaneously.
The separate switching by Auxiliary for control by Connection capacity
pushing the pushbuttons, which maintained contact 10mm2 rigid cables
are connected with the latching When control devices with 6mm2 flexible cables
relay, remains possible. permanent impulse are
externally driven, e.g. time
The EPN 052 allows an overall switches or limit switches, an
central control of individual impulse control directly to the
central on/off EPN 050 latching relay’s coil is possible
with the auxiliary contact
EPN 053.
Designation Voltage supply Width in ❚ Pack Cat. Ref.

17.5mm qty.
Auxiliary for 24 to 230V AC 1/2 1 EPN050

centralised control
11
12 14
EPN050
Auxiliary contact 2A 250 V AC 1/2 1 EPN051
21 23
22 24
EPN051

multi levelled
centralised control
31 33
32 34
EPN052

control by 12 to 110V DC
maintained contact
11
12 14
EPN053
D.4
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 120
latching relays
EPN510 EPN516 EPN501 EPN513 EPN511 EPN512 EPN525 EPN548 EPN528
EPN515 EPN523 EPN503 EPN518 EPN519 EPN522 EPN540 EPN541
EPN520 EPN526 EPN524 EPN521 EPN546
Coil in AC
voltage rating 230V 110V 48V 24V 12V 8V 230V 48V 24V
tolerance +10/-20%
frequency 50Hz
start consumption 25VA 55VA
Coil in DC
voltage rating 110V 48V 24V 12V - - 110V 24V 12V
tolerance +10/-20%
start consumption 12VA 25VA
Contacts
max. perm. Current AC1 16A
voltage 250V AC 400V AC
electrical endurance 150 000 operations
mechanical endurance 500 000 operations
ohmic loss per current path 1.2W
minimum duration of impulse 50 ms
maximum time under voltage 1H
pushbutton with signal lamp
without condensator 6 (1mA / lamp)
ingress protection IP20
working temperature -5 to +40°C
storage temperature -40 to +80°C
Connection
2
flexible 6 mm
2
rigid 10 mm
* condensator parrallel with the coil
Incandescent lamps 230V load 40W 60W 75W 100W 150W 200W 300W 500W
with and without halogen number 45 30 24 15 12 9 5 3
Incandescent lamps load 20W 50W 75W 100W 150W 300W
Low voltage halogen number 70 28 19 14 9 3
Fluorescent lamps load 15W 18W 30W 36W 58W
Uncompensated number 29 25 25 24 14
Fluorescent lamps load 15W 18W 30W 36W 58W
Parrallel compensation number 27 27 25 25 16
C total max(a) 121μF 121μF 112μF 112μF 112μF
Two lamps circuit load 2x18W 2x20W 2x36W 2x40W 2x58W 2x65W
series compensation number 40 40 22 22 12 12
C 2.7μF 2.7μF 3.4μF 3.4μF 5.3μF 5.3mF
load 18W 36W 58W
number 30 28 15
Two lamp circuit with load 2x18W 2x36W 2x58W
electronics power supply units number 15 13 8
Fluo compact load 7W 10W 18W 26W
uncompensated number 50 45 40 25
Fluo compact electronic load 11W 15W 20W 23W
power supply unit number 80 60 50 40
High intensity discharge
metal halogen lamps, load 50W 80W 125W 250W 400W
uncompensated number 11 9 7 3 2
Metal halogen lamps, load 50W 80W 125W 250W 400W
parrallel compensation number 9 8 6 3 2
C total max(a) 63μF 58μF 60μF 54μF 50μF
High pressure sodium vapour load 70W 150W 250W 400W
lamps, uncompensated number 9 5 3 2
High pressure sodium vapour load 70W 150W 250W 400W
lamps, parrallel compensated number 5 3 2 1
C total max(a) 60μF 54μF 64μF 50μF
(a): these values must not be exceeded
D.5
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 121
auxiliaries for latching relays
Auxiliaries for latching relays Installation of the auxiliaries

EPN050 EPN051 EPN052 - EPN053
voltage rating (a) - (a) 2
24 to 230V AC - 24 to 230V AC
nominal load - 2A/250V AC -
lmin/230V AC - 15mA -
storage temperature -40 to 80°C
Connections : flexible 6 mm2
3
rigid 10mm2 1
(a) : according to a latching relay connected with an auxiliary

4
Application diagram
centralised command (EPN 050 - EPN 052)
N
general
OFF ON centralised
command
local local local local

command command command command
EPN 050 EPN 050 EPN 050 EPN 050
EPN 052 33 33
31 11 11 31 11 11
A1 1 3 A1 1 3 A1 1 3 A1 1 3
A2 2 4 A2 2 4 A2 2 4 A2 2 4
32 14 14 32 14 14
ON OFF ON OFF
34 12 12 34 12 12
EPN 052
group group
centralised centralised
command command
Remote signalling (EPN 051) Maintained command (EPN 053)
23
11
C.20
21
A1 1 3
A1 1 3
A2 2 4
A2 2 4
12
22
14
24
D.6
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 122
relays and interface relays
Relays dissipation insert LZ060 between is under voltage.

To provide remote control of low each 3 products. These relays ensure a galvanic
power circuits max.16A. isolation between LV and VLV up
Auxiliary contact to 4kV.
They are equipped with a 3 Associated with a relay, it allows
position manual control button: remote signaling.
- permanent ON, Mechanical status indicator
- automatic mode,
- permanent OFF. Interface relays
Power contacts adapted to very
Complies with IEC 61095. low voltage circuits. It is operat-
ing silently.
It is recommended to use a heat A signal indicates when the coil
Description Type Coil AC In Width in ❚ Pack Cat. ref.

50Hz power circuit 17.5mm qty.
AC7-a / AC1
Relays
2NO 230V 16A-250V 1 1 ERC216
24V 16A-250V 1 1 ERD216
8/12V 16A-250V 1 1 ERL216
2NC 230V 16A-250V 1 1 ERC217
24V 16A-250V 1 1 ERD217
8/12V 16A-250V 1 1 ERL217
1NO+1NC 230V 16A-250V 1 12 ERC218

ERD218
24V 16A-250V 1 1 ERD218
8/12V 16A-250V 1 1 ERL218
3NO 230V 16A-440V 2 1 ERC316
4NO 230V 16A-440V 2 1 ERC416
2NO+2NC 230V 16A-440V 2 1 ERC418
24V 16A-440V 2 1 ERD418
12V 16A-440V 2 1 ERL418
Humfree relays
ERC418
2NO+2NC 24V 16A-440V 2 1 ERD418S
AC/DC
12V 16A-440V 2 1 ERL418S

AC/DC
Interface relays VLV/LV coil voltage: 1 1 EN145

A1 1
10 to 26V AC/DC
output: 1 changeover contact
A2 2 4 max. 5A 230V AC
min. 10mA - 12V DC
Interface relays LV/VLV coil voltage: 1 1 EN146

A1 1
230V AC
output: 1 changeover contact
A2 2 4 max. 5A 230V AC
min. 10mA - 12V DC
EN145
D.7
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 123
contactors
Contactors and heating dissipation are

Contactors are essential power needed.
devices to control heating,
lighting or ventilation systems. Complies with IEC 61095.
They are recommended in
association with control and The contactors can be associat-
energy management devices ed with the auxiliary contact
(thermostats, delay timers, ESC080 for remote signaling.
programmers...)
It is recommended to use a heat
Standard 1❚ and 2❚ versions are dissipation insert LZ060
recommended for applications between each 3 products.
where a reduced consumption

AC7-a / AC1
Contactors
1NO 230V 25A-250V 1 12 ESC125
24V 25A-250V 1 1 ESD125
8/12V 25A-250V 1 1 ESL125
1NC 230V 25A-250V 1 1 ESC126
2NO 230V 25A-250V 1 12 ESC225
40A-440V 3 1 ESC240
ESC225 63A-440V 3 1 ESC263
24V 25A-250V 1 12 ESD225
40A-440V 3 1 ESD240
63A-440V 3 1 ESD263
12V 40A-440V 3 1 ESL240
63A-440V 3 1 ESL263
8/12V 25A-250V 1 1 ESL225
110/127V 25A-250V 1 1 ESM225
2NC 230V 25A-250V 1 12 ESC226
40A-440V 3 1 ESC241
63A-440V 3 1 ESC264
24V 25A-250V 1 1 ESD226

ESD263
40A-440V 3 1 ESD241
63A-440V 3 1 ESD264
12V 40A-440V 3 1 ESL241
63A-440V 3 1 ESL264
8/12V 25A-250V 1 1 ESL226
1NO+1NC 230V 25A-250V 1 12 ESC227
24V 25A-250V 1 1 ESD227
8/12V 25A-250V 1 1 ESL227
110/127V 25A-250V 1 1 ESM227
3NO 230V 25A-440V 2 6 ESC325
40A-440V 3 4 ESC340
ESC325
63A-440V 3 1 ESC363
D.8
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 124
contactors

AC7-a / AC1
Contactors
4NO 230V 25A-440V 2 6 ESC425
40A-440V 3 4 ESC440
63A-440V 3 4 ESC463
24V 25A-440V 2 6 ESD425
40A-440V 3 1 ESD440
63A-440V 3 1 ESD463
12V 25A-440V 2 1 ESL425

ESC425 40A-440V 3 1 ESL440
63A-440V 3 1 ESL463
110/127V 40A-440V 3 1 ESM440
4NC 230V 25A-440V 2 1 ESC426
40A-440V 3 1 ESC441
63A-440V 3 1 ESC464
24V 25A-440V 2 1 ESD426
63A-440V 3 1 ESD464
12V 25A-440V 2 1 ESL426
2NO+2NC 230V 25A-440V 2 1 ESC427
40A-440V 3 1 ESC442
ESC463
63A-440V 3 1 ESC465
24V 25A-440V 2 1 ESD427
12V 25A-440V 2 1 ESL427
3NO+1NC 230V 25A-440V 2 6 ESC428
40A-440V 3 4 ESC443
63A-440V 3 1 ESC466
24V 25A-440V 2 1 ESD428
12V 25A-440V 2 1 ESL428
D.9
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 125
humfree contactors
Humfree contactors The humfree versions are It is recommended to use a heat

Contactors are essential power recommended for housing dissipation insert LZ060
devices to control heating, applications where silent between each product.
lighting or ventilation systems. operating is requested.
They are recommended in
association with other control Complies with IEC 61095.
and energy management
devices (thermostats, delay The contactors can be associat-
timers, programmers...) ed with the auxiliaries contact
ESC080 for remote signaling,
except the ESx225S.
Description Type Coil In Width in ❚ Pack Cat. ref.

power circuit 17.5mm qty.
AC7-a / AC1
Humfree contactors
2NO 230V 50/60Hz 25A-250V 1 12 ESC225S

220V DC
40A-440V 3 4 ESC240S
63A-440V 3 4 ESC263S
24V 50Hz 25A-250V 1 1 ESD225S
24V DC
40A-440V 3 1 ESD240S
63A-440V 3 1 ESD263S
12V 50Hz 25A-250V 1 1 ESL225S
12V DC
40A-440V 3 1 ESL240S
ESC225S 63A-440V 3 1 ESL263S

3NO 230V 50/60Hz 25A-440V 2 6 ESC325S
220V DC
40A-440V 3 1 ESC340S
63A-440V 3 1 ESC363S
24V 50Hz 25A-440V 2 1 ESD325S
24V DC
4NO 230V 50/60Hz 25A-440V 2 6 ESC425S
220V DC
40A-440V 3 1 ESC440S
63A-440V 3 1 ESC463S
24V 50Hz 25A-440V 2 1 ESD425S
24V DC
40A-440V 3 1 ESD440S
63A-440V 3 1 ESD463S
12V 50Hz 25A-440V 2 1 ESL425S
12V DC
40A-440V 3 1 ESL440S
63A-440V 3 1 ESL463S
4NC 230V 50/60Hz 25A-440V 2 1 ESC426S
ESC425S
220V DC
24V 50Hz 25A-440V 2 1 ESD426S
24V DC
12V 50Hz 25A-440V 2 1 ESL426S
12V DC
2NO+2NC 230V 50/60Hz 25A-440V 2 1 ESC427S
220V DC
24V 50Hz 25A-440V 2 1 ESD427S
24V DC
12V 50Hz 25A-440V 2 1 ESL427S
12V DC
3NO+1NC 230V 50/60Hz 25A-440V 2 1 ESC428S
220V DC
24V 50Hz 25A-440V 2 1 ESD428S
24V DC
ESC463S
12V 50Hz 25A-440V 2 1 ESL428S
12V DC
D.10
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 126
override contactors
Override contactors Complies with IEC 61095.

For the remote switching and
control of power circuits. It is recommended to use a heat
dissipation insert LZ060
They are equipped with a 3 between each 3 products.
position manual control button:
- permanent ON,
- automatic mode,
- permanent OFF.
Can be associated with the

auxiliary contact ESC080 for
remote signaling.

AC7-a / AC1
Override contactors
1NO 230V 25A-250V 1 12 ERC125
2NO 230V 25A-250V 1 12 ERC225
40A-440V 3 1 ERC240
63A-440V 3 1 ERC263
24V 25A-250V 1 12 ERD225
40A-440V 3 1 ERD240
ERC225 63A-440V 3 1 ERD263
12V 25A-250V 3 1 ERL225
40A-440V 3 1 ERL240
63A-440V 3 1 ERL263
8/12V 25A-250V 1 1 ERL225
2NC 230V 25A-250V 1 12 ERC226
3NO 230V 25A-440V 2 6 ERC325
4NO 230V 25A-440V 2 6 ERC425
24V 25A-440V 2 6 ERD425
12V 25A-440V 2 1 ERL425
4NC 230V 25A-440V 2 1 ERC426
2NO+2NC 230V 25A-440V 2 1 ERC427
ERC425
3NO+1NC 230V 25A-440V 2 1 ERC428
D.11
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 127
humfree override contactors
Humfree override contactors operating is requested.

For the remote switching and
control of power circuits. Complies with IEC 61095.
They are equipped with a 3 Can be associated with the

position manual control button: auxiliary contact ESC080,
- permanent ON, except 1 module humfree con-
- automatic mode, tactors (ERC225S).
- permanent OFF.
It is recommended to use a heat
The humfree versions are dissipation insert LZ060
recommended for housing between each product.
applications where silent
Description Type Coil In Width in ❚ Pack Cat. ref.

AC7-a / AC1
Humfree override contactors
2NO 230V 50/60Hz 25A-250V 1 1 ERC225S

220V DC
40A-440V 3 1 ERC240S
24V 50Hz 40A-440V 3 1 ERD240S

24V DC
63A-440V 3 1 ERD263S
12V 50Hz 40A-440V 3 1 ERL240S

12V DC
63A-440V 3 1 ERL263S
3NO 230V 50/60Hz 25A-440V 2 6 ERC325S

220V DC
ERC225S
4NO 230V 50/60Hz 25A-440V 2 1 ERC425S

220V DC
24V 50Hz 25A-440V 2 1 ERD425S

24V DC
12V 50Hz 25A-440V 2 1 ERL425S

12V DC
ERC425S
D.12
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 128
night & day contactors
Night & day contactors Standard 1❚ and 2❚ versions are Complies with NF EN 61095
Night & day contactors allows recommended for applications
the functioning of electrical where a reduced consumption Auxiliary contact
devices during off-peak hours, and heating dissipation are - associated with a contactor, it
especially storage heaters and needed. allows remote signaling,
water-heaters. - mechanical status indicator.
The manual override allows: The humfree versions ETCx25S
- temporary override with are recommended for housing
automatic return at next coil applications where silent
energization, operating is requested.
- permanent switch-off in case Humfree operating is guaranteed
of long leave. in time, switching noise is
reduced.

AC7-a / AC1
Night & day contactors
2NO 230V 50Hz 25A-250V 1 1 ETC225
2NC 230V 50Hz 25A-250V 1 1 ETC226
1NO+1NC 230V 50Hz 25A-400V 1 1 ETC227
3NO 230V 50Hz 25A-440V 2 1 ETC325
ETC225 230V 50Hz 40A-440V 3 1 ETC340
230V 50Hz 63A-440V 3 1 ETC363
4NO 230V 50Hz 25A-440V 2 1 ETC425
230V 50Hz 40A-440V 3 1 ETC440
230V 50Hz 63A-440V 3 1 ETC463
Humfree night & day contactors
2NO 230V 50/60Hz 25A-250V 1 1 ETC225S

220V DC
3NO 230V 50/60Hz 25A-250V 2 1 ETC325S

220V DC
ETC425S
4NO 230V 50/60Hz 25A-250V 2 1 ETC425S
220V DC
D.13
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 129
auxiliaries for contactors and relays
Auxiliary contact Heat dissipation insert

Associated with a relay or a It is recommended to use a heat
contactor, it allows to show the dissipation insert LZ060
product status or remote between each 3 products.
signaling.
Not compatible with 1 module Sealing covers
humfree contactors and EN145 / Not compatible with EN145 /
EN146. EN146.
Description Type In Width in ❚ Pack Cat. ref.

AC7-a / AC1
Auxiliary contact
13 11 1NO+1NC 6A-250V 1/2 1 ESC080
14 12
ESC080
Sealing cover for 1❚ contactors 1 10 ESC001
for 2❚ contactors 2 10 ESC002
for 3❚ contactors 3 10 ESC003
ESC002
Heat dissipation insert 1/2 12 LZ060
LZ060
D.14
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 130
contactors and override contactors
Description Modular contactor and relay Auxiliary

contact
Standard conformity EN 61095

Approvals NF - VDE - IMQ - KEMA - RMC / CCC
Relay Contactor Relay Contactor Contactor Contactor Accessory
Number of modules 1 2 3 0.5
Thermal current Ith (40°C) 16A 25A 16A 25A 40A 63A 6A
Rated frequency 50Hz 50Hz 50Hz 50Hz 50Hz 50Hz 50Hz
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 250V 250V 440V 440V 440V 440V 250V
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) 4kV 4kV 4kV 4kV 4kV 4kV 4kV
Protection degree 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Rated operating currents and power ratings in AC
AC-1 / rated operational currents Ie 16A 25A 16A 25A 40A 63A -
AC-7a rated operatio- 230V 3kW 4.6kW 3kW 4.6kW 7.3kW 11.6kW -
nal power 400V - - 8.9kW 13.8kW 22kW 35kW -
AC-3 / rated operational currents Ie 5.5A 8.5A 5.5A 8.5A 25A 32A -
AC-7b rated operatio- 230V 570W 880W 570W 880W 2.6W 3.3W -
nal power 400V - - 1.7kW 2.6kW 7.8kW 10kW -
AC-12 rated operational currents at - - - - - - 6A
230V
AC-15 rated operational currents at - - - - - - 2A

230V
Mechanical and electrical endurances

Mechanical endurance nr of 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000
operations
Electrical endurance at Ie nr of 60,000 60,000 60,000 60,000 60,000 60,000 60,000

AC7a (AC12 for aux contacts) operations
MCB protected short-circuit withstand

Prospected short-circuit rms 1kA 3kA 1kA 3kA 3kA 3kA 1kA
current
Associated protection MCB MCB MCB MCB MCB MCB 6A 10x38 gG

C16-6kA C25-6kA C16-6kA C25-6kA C40-10kA C63-10kA fuse or mcb
Power dissipation
Power dissipation per current path 1W 1.5W 1W 1.5W 3.2W 5W 0.4W
Magnetic system for eco and standard contactor
Pick-up 7.4VA 7.4VA 9.2VA 9.2VA 60VA 60VA -
Coil consumption 1.8VA 1.8VA 1.85VA 1.85VA 7VA 7VA -
Closing delay 25ms 25ms 25ms 25ms 25ms 25ms -
Opening delay 15ms 15ms 15ms 15ms 20ms 20ms -
Connection
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Main contact rigid 1...10mm 1...10mm 1...10mm 1...10mm 4...25mm 4...25mm 1...6mm
cable section flexible 1...6mm
2
1...6mm
2
1...6mm
2
1...6mm
2
4...16mm
2
4...16mm
2
1...6mm
2
Main contact type M3.4 M3.4 M3.4 M3.4 M5 M5 M3.4

connection screw posidrive PZ2 PZ2 PZ2 PZ2 PZ2 PZ2 PZ2
max. tight. 1.2Nm 1.2Nm 1.2Nm 1.2Nm 2Nm 2Nm 1.2Nm
torque
2 2 2 2 2 2
Coil connection rigid 1...10mm 1...10mm 1...10mm 1...10mm 1...10mm 1...10mm -
cable section flexible 1...6mm
2
1...6mm
2
1...6mm
2
1...6mm
2
1...6mm
2
1...6mm
2
-
Coil connection type M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M4 M4 -
screw posidrive PZ2 PZ2 PZ2 PZ2 PZ2 PZ2 -
max. tight. 1.2Nm 1.2Nm 1.2Nm 1.2Nm 1.5Nm 1.5Nm -
torque
Working temperature
-10°C to +50°C
Storage temperature
-40°C to +80°C
D.15
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 131
choice of contactors
Choice of contactors Heating applications

The choice of contactor is based on many factors: The choice of the contactor is based on the electrical heating load,
- type of the load supplied, and the targeted life time.
- nominal current of the load,
- operating voltage,
- number of operations, etc..
The contactors are AC7-a (resistive load) and AC7-b (inductive load)
approved.
Single phase Three phase supply
Number of operations 60,000 100,000 150,000 300,000 600,000

Maximum load* 230V 16A 3.0 2.5 1.9 0.8 0.7
in kW 25A 4.6 4.0 3.0 1.3 1.0
40A 7.3 6.3 4.7 2.2 1.6
63A 11.6 10.0 7.5 3.5 2.5
400V 16A 8.9 8.0 5.8 2.8 2.0
25A 13.8 12.0 8.6 4.3 3.0
40A 22.0 18.5 14.3 6.3 5.0
63A 35.0 30.0 22.6 10.2 7.6
* On three phase configuration the maximum load per phase Example:

corresponds to the values states divided by 3. Function of a heating installation 200 days/annum, 75 operations
per day (1 opening + 1 closing = 2 operations)
Mechanical life = 10 years
Total number of operations: 200 x 75 x 10 = 150,000
in that case, depending on the type of circuit, select a contactor 40A
230V to control a load of 4.7 kW, or a contactor 16A 400V to control
a load up to 5.8 kW.
Motor applications (AC7-b equivalent to AC3)

Single phase 230V Three phase 400V
R R
Y B
Contactor rating Control diagram

2P 230V single phase 3P 400V three phase
Maximum power for the motor 16A 0.57 kW 1.7 kW
25A 0.88 kW 2.65 kW
40A 2.6 kW 7.8 kW
63A 3.3 kW 10 kW
Influence of working temperature: Adjacent fitting:

Derating factor between 40°C and 50°C : 0.9 It is necessary to put a heat dissipation insert (reference LZ060)
Example: heating with convector between each 3 products, or each humfree contact.
The maximum load of ESC225 is 4.6kW for 60,000 operations
and for a temperature <40°C.
between 40°C and 50°C, the load is 4.6 x 0.9 i.e. 4.14kW
D.16
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 132
lighting selection
Lighting selection If the inrush current is not known, choose the column “I peak high” in
Due to the large variety of electrical characteristics in lamps, order to favour the contactor lifetime.
especially for the inrush current, the chart gives the maximum num- The table below indicates the number of lamps (or dual fittings) that
ber of lamps based on the lamp technology and the inrush current can be connected to each pole of the contactor on 230V/50hz
(high / low). The goal is to give the most precise and the highest circuits.
number of lamps acceptable for the contactor.
1 and 2 modules 3 modules

Type Power I peak high I peak low I peak high I peak low I peak high I peak low I peak high I peak low
16A 16A 25A 25A 40A 40A 63A 63A
Incandescent lamps
tungsten & halogen lamps 40W 32 38 50 60 76 102 120 160
60W 21 31 33 48 67 79 105 125
75W 17 24 27 38 67 63 105 100
100W 13 19 20 30 41 48 65 75
150W 9 13 13 20 29 32 45 50
200W 6 10 10 15 22 24 35 38
300W 4 6 7 10 15 16 23 25
500W 3 4 4 6 9 10 14 15
1000W 1 2 2 3 4 5 7 8
Fluorescent tubes
energy saving lamp 13W 11 21 17 33 55 108 86 170
compact fluo lamp 14W 7 21 11 33 36 108 57 170
with external electronic ballast 17W 7 21 11 33 36 108 57 170
or compensated 18W 7 21 11 33 36 108 57 170
24W 7 17 11 27 36 75 57 91
26W 7 12 11 19 36 58 57 91
32W 7 12 11 19 36 58 57 91
36W 7 12 11 19 36 58 57 91
40W 7 12 11 19 36 58 57 91
42W 7 12 11 19 36 58 57 91
55W 7 12 11 19 36 58 57 91
60W 6 10 10 15 27 42 42 66
energy saving lamp 5W 17 32 27 50 86 159 135 250

compact fluo lamp 7W 17 32 27 50 86 159 135 250
with integrated electronic ballast 9W 17 32 27 50 86 159 135 250
substitute for incandescent lamps 11W 17 32 27 50 86 159 135 250
15W 17 32 27 50 86 159 135 250
18W 13 22 20 35 63 111 100 175
20W 13 22 20 35 63 111 100 175
23W 13 22 20 35 63 111 100 175
26W 13 22 20 35 63 111 100 175
single - electronic ballast 14W 7 32 11 50 36 162 57 255

or compensated 21W 7 21 11 33 36 108 57 170
22W 7 21 11 33 36 108 57 170
24W 7 17 11 27 36 81 57 127
28W 7 17 11 27 34 81 53 127
35W 7 17 11 27 34 81 53 127
39W 7 12 11 19 29 58 45 91
40W 7 12 11 19 29 58 45 91
49W 6 12 10 19 29 58 45 91
54W 6 12 10 19 29 58 45 91
55W 6 10 10 15 27 44 42 70
60W 6 10 10 15 27 44 42 70
80W 6 10 10 15 27 44 42 70
95W 6 7 10 11 25 29 39 46
120W 6 7 10 11 25 29 39 46
double - electronic ballast 2x14W 7 17 11 27 34 81 53 127

2x21W 7 12 11 19 29 58 45 91
2x28W 6 10 10 15 27 44 42 70
2x40W 6 10 10 15 27 44 42 70
2x49W 6 7 10 11 25 29 39 46
2x60W 6 7 10 11 25 29 39 46
D.17
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 133
lighting selection
1 and 2 modules 3 modules

Type Power I peak high I peak low I peak high I peak low I peak high I peak low I peak high I peak low
16A 16A 25A 25A 40A 40A 63A 63A
Discharge lamps
Low pressure sodium-vapour lamps 18W 8 12 10 18 18 23 21 36
(uncompensated) 35W 4 6 6 10 10 16 13 25
55W 3 6 6 9 9 14 12 22
90W 2 4 4 6 6 13 9 20
135W 1 3 3 4 4 8 6 12
180W 1 2 2 3 4 6 5 10
low pressure sodium-vapour lamps 35W 4 6 6 10 13 33 23 51

(electronic ballast) 55W 3 5 5 8 13 24 19 38
66W 3 5 4 8 13 24 19 38
91W 2 4 3 6 13 20 16 31
high pressure sodium-vapour lamps 35W 11 17 14 22 30 40 35 60

(uncompensated) 50W 9 15 12 17 22 28 25 42
70W 8 10 9 12 18 20 19 32
80W 7 9 8 11 15 19 18 29
110W 6 8 7 10 14 17 16 25
150W 4 6 5 7 10 13 12 18
250W 2 3 3 4 6 8 7 11
400W 0 0 0 1 4 5 5 8
1000W 0 0 0 1 2 3 3 4
high pressure sodium-vapour lamps 45W 6 10 9 12 13 36 25 45

60W 6 10 9 12 13 32 23 41
70W 4 6 6 9 13 23 18 36
100W 3 6 5 9 13 18 16 32
150W 3 6 5 9 13 14 14 30
halogen metal vapour lamp 35W 12 27 24 40 42 68 55 106

(uncompensated) 70W 10 16 15 24 26 42 34 64
150W 6 8 7 12 14 20 17 32
250W 3 5 5 8 9 14 12 21
400W 1 3 2 4 6 8 7 13
1000W 0 0 0 1 3 4 4 5
halogen metal vapour lamp 20W 6 13 10 20 22 56 34 88

70W 5 10 8 15 22 56 39 80
150W 3 6 5 12 12 32 22 60
210W 4 6 5 12 10 28 19 50
315W 4 6 5 12 8 26 17 48
D.18
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 134
Power interface
programming
solution for energy efficiency
Contactors, relays, delay timers, latching relays, energymeters: a whole range of devices to control
installations for more energy efficiency.
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 135
time switches and twilightswitches

selection chart D21
analogue time switches modular D22
analogue time switches

72 x 72mm D24
digital time switches D29
time lag switches D35
delay timers D37
indicator lights D40
push buttons D41
transformers, bells and buzzers D43
thermostats D45
analogue voltmeters, ammeters D50
digital voltmeters, ammeters,

current transformers (C.T.) D52
selector switches D53
multi-function meters D55
energymeters D57
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 136
time switches and twilight switches

selection chart
Analogue time switches

(din rail mounted) :
width in 1 ❚ : width in 5 ❚ :
EH010, EH011, EH071 EH191
Technical
characteristics EH010 EH011 EH071 EH209 EH210 EH211 EH271 EH191 EH110 EH111 EH110A EH111A EH171A
width in 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 5 3 3 3 3 3
❚ 17.5mm
voltage 230V 230V 230V 110/ 110/ 230V 230V 230V 110/ 230V 6 to 24V 6 to 24V 6 to 24V
230V 230V 230V AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC
operating 24 hrs 24hrs 7 days 24 hrs 24 hrs 24 hrs 7 days 24 hrs/ 24 hrs 24 hrs 24 hrs 24 hrs 7 days
cycle 7 days
minimum 30 min 30 min 3 hrs 30 30 min 30 min 30 min 3 hrs 30 15 min/ 15 min 15 min 30 min 30 min 4 hrs
switching 2h
supply failure - 200 hrs 200 hrs - - 200 hrs 200 hrs 200 hrs - 200hrs - 200 hrs 200 hrs
reserve
manual auto/ auto/ auto/ auto/ auto/ auto/ auto/ auto/ auto/ auto/ auto/ auto/ auto/
override on on on on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off
Analogue time switches

(72 x 72mm) :
EH710, EH711, EH770, EH771,

EH712, EH715, EH716
Technical
characteristics EH710 EH711 EH770 EH771 EH712 EH715 EH716
voltage 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 48V DC
supply 110-230VAC
operating 24 h 24 h 7 days 7 days 24 h 24 h 24 h
cycle
minimum 20 min 20 min 2 hrs. 2 hrs. 20 min 20 min 20 min
switching
supply failure - 200 h - 200 h - - 200 h
reserve
manual on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off on/off
override
Digital time switches and

Twilight switches :
width in 1 ❚ : width in 3 ❚ : width in 4 ❚ :

EG010, EG071 EG110, EG170, EG403E EE171
EG210, EG270
Digital time switches (din rail mounted) Twilight switches
Technical EG103B EG203B EE100 EE170
characteristics EG010 EG071 EG110 EG170 EG103E EG210 EG270 EG203E EG403E EG293B EG493E EE101 EE110 EE171
width in ❚17.5mm 1 1 3 3 2 3 3 2 4 4 4 3 5 3
operating cycles 24 h 7 days 24 h 7 days 7 days 24 h 7 days 7 days 7 days 1 year 1 year - 24 h 7 days
program steps 5 20 20 20 56 20 20 56 300 300 300 - 15 min 1 min
voltage supply 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V
n° of channels 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 4 2 4 - 1 1
D.21
101132 SEA_D01-93.qxd_D 9/12/12 11:32 AM Page 137
analogue time switches modular
Description Technical data Minimum switching time:

Electromechanical time - programming by captive - 15 min for daily versions
switches 1 channel for daily or segments. - 2 hours for weekly versions
weekly programming. - manual override: - 15 min and 2 hours on the
To control lighting, heating, On 1 module devices: daily+weekly version
household appliances, shop - automatic
windows etc... - permanent ON Connection capacity:
2
To improve comfort and save On 3 and 5 module devices: 1 to 4mm
energy. - automatic
- permanent ON Complies with EN 60 730.
Applications - permanent OFF
Domestic and commercial
premises.
DIN rail mounting
Designation Voltage Cycle Width in ❚ Cat. ref.

17.5 mm
Analogue time switches 230 V 24h 1 EH010

modular compact 50 Hz without battery reserve
1 NO
16 A - 250 V AC1 24h 1 EH011
reserve: 200 h
7day 1 EH071
reserve: 200h
EH071
Analogue time switches 230 V 24h without hand 2 EH209

standard modular version 50 Hz without battery reserve
1 NO changeover
16 A - 250 V AC1 24h 2 EH210
without battery reserve
24h 2 EH211
reserve: 200 h
7day 2 EH271
reserve: 200 h
EH191 24h + 7day 5 EH191

reserve: 200h
24h 3 EH110
without battery reserve
24h 3 EH111
reserve: 200h
6 to 24 V 24h 3 EH110A
AC/DC without battery reserve
24h 3 EH111A
reserve: 200 h
EH111
7day 3 EH171A
reserve: 200 h
Sealing kit for 3 “modules” EH901

time switch
EH110A Wall mounting kit for EH902

3 “modules” time switch
D.22
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 138
analogue time switches modular
EH010 EH011 EH071 EH110 EH111 EH191
Width in ❚ 17.5mm 1 1 1 3 3 5
Version daily daily weekly daily + weekly
voltage supply 230V +10/-10% 230V 230V 230V +10/-10%
frequency 50/60Hz
consumption 0.5VA
output 1NO changeover
Switching capacity
AC1 16A/250V
inductive load (cos = 0.6) 4A/250V 3A/250V
incandescent lamps 900W
Characteristics
technology quartz
dial 24 h 7 days 24 h 24 h and 7 days
switching dial 15 min 1h 45 15 min and 2 h
min. switching 30 min 3 h 30 15 min 15 min and 2 h
max. number of switching 96 96 96/84
accuracy +/- 1 sec per day
supply failure reserve 200 h 200 h 200 h
reached in 120 h 120 h
manual override auto/ON/OFF
Environment
2
connection 0.5 to 4mm
EH209 EH210 EH211 EH271 EH110A EH111A EH171A

Width in ❚ 17.5mm 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
Version daily daily daily weekly daily daily weekly
voltage supply 230V +10/-15% 230V +10/-15% 6 to 24V AC/DC
frequency 50/60Hz 50/60 Hz
consumption 0.5 VA 0.5 VA
output 1NO changeover 1 NO changeover
Switching capacity
AC1 16A/230V 16A/230V
inductive load (cos = 0.6) 4A/230V 4A/230V
incandescent lamps 1000W 900W
Characteristics
technology quartz quartz
dial 24 h 7 days 24 h 7 days
switching dial 15 min 1 h 45 15 min 2h
min. switching 30 min 3 h 30 30 min 4h
max. number of switching 48 48
accuracy +/- 1 sec per day ± 6 min per year
supply failure reserve - - 200 hours 200 hours - 72 hours 72 hours
reached in - - 120 hours 120 hours - 120 hours 120 hours
manual override auto/ON/OFF auto/ON/OFF
Environment
ingress protection IP20 IP20
working temperature -10 to +55°C -10° to +55°C
storage temperature -20° to +70°C -20° to +70°C -10° to +55°C
2 2
connection 1.5 to 6mm 1 to 4mm
EH110 Electrical connections EH010, EH011 electrical connections Simple time setting and programming using dual direction dial
D.23
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 139
analogue time switches 72 x 72mm
Description Technical data Daily version

For daily or weekly - suitable for surface, flush or Programming in steps of
programming. din rail mounting 10 minutes.
1 channel for the control of - programming by captive Minimum time between
lighting, heating, household segments 2 switching intervals: 20 min
appliances, shop windows etc.. - manual override with automatic
To improve comfort and save return to programme Weekly version
energy. - operating reserve: 200 hours Programming in steps of one
after being connected for 120 hour.
Applications hours - minimum time between
Domestic and commercial - with clock hand 2 switching intervals: 2 hours
premises. - output: voltage free - switching accuracy: 10 min
changeover contact 16A/250V
Complies with EN 60 730-2-7.
Designation Characteristics Pack Cat. ref.

qty.
1 channel daily cycle supply : 230V 50/60Hz
without battery reserve 1 EH710
with battery reserve 1 EH711
reserve : 200 hours after being

connected for 120 hours
EH711
1 channel weekly cycle supply : 230V 50/60Hz
without battery reserve 1 EH770
with battery reserve 1 EH771
reserve : 200 hours after being

connected for 120 hours
EH771
1 channel daily cycle supply : 6 to 24V AC/DC 50/60Hz
without battery reserve 1 EH710A
Flush mounting kit EH900
D.24
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 140
EH710 EH711 EH770 EH771 EH710A
Dimensions (mm) 72x72x48 72x72x48 72x72x48 72x72x48 72x72x48
Electrical characteristics daily daily weekly weekly daily
voltage supply 230V +10/-15% 110V to 240V AC 50/60Hz

50/60Hz 48V DC +10/-15%
consumption 0.5VA
output 1 changeover 1 N/O
Switching capacity
AC1 16A/250V
inductive load (cos = 0.6) 3A/250V
incandescent lighting 1000W
Characteristics
technology quartz
dial 24h 7 days 24h
switching dial 10min 1 hour 10 min
minimum switching 20min 2 hour 20 min
working accuracy +/- 1 sec per day
supply failure reserve - 200 hours - 200 hours -
reached in 120 hours 120 hours
manual switch temporary ON or OFF
Environment

2
connection capacity 1 to 6mm
D.25
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 141
EH710 Electrical connection
Very easy programming

with dual direction dial
Manual override
D.17 D.26
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 142
Compact and flexible

make it easier
with a software for a quick and easy programming
The new Hager digital time switches have been developed and adapted to suit today’s expectations of
contractors and those of his customers.
3
4 8
5
6
7
The advantages for you : Technical data :
• Automatic change of Summer / Winter time • Quick copy and saving of the program with the EG005 key
• 56 programs steps • Easy manual programming or via interface and PC
• Programming per day or group of days, programming software EG003
• Permanent override with the programming key • Reduced width : 2 modules
• Override : permanent / temporary
• 5 years of operating reserve with lithium battery
• Bar graph for visualization of the daily profile
• Programmable without mains supply
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 143
Expert
tips
1 5
Display and buttons are Direct programming key
protected with a cover. via an interface EG003
with his programming
software on PC
2 6
Back light display for an Always well-informed
easier use (EG103E, You can print a personalised
EG203E). file for your customers. Thus
all the project and programming
information can be kept in
the electrical distribution
board.
3 7
Bar graph for visualization Evolutionary
of the daily profile. Your customer can use
different keys to adapt the
programs to his lifestyle.
4 8
Reduced number of Quick programming
programming and Quick copy and saving of the
navigation buttons. program with the EG005 key.
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 144
digital time switches
Description Programming key : EG103E and EG203E

Use : domestic and commercial - to allow easy back up and (evolution version)
buildings re-installation of the program to Same characteristics as EG103B
For the control of lighting, allow permanent program and EG203B plus more :
heating, household appliances, overrides. - holidays mode : forcing ON or
shop windows, signage etc..., to - programming per day or group OFF between two dates
improve comfort and to save energy. of days - presence simulation - random
- 56 ON/OFF programme steps switching
EG103B and EG203B - permanent ON/OFF overrides - backlighted screen
(basic version) - temporary ON/OFF overrides - impulse programming
Product set at current time and - bar graph indication showing capability (1s to 30min)
date when delivered. the daily profile
Automatic change of summer / - programming supply. Operating voltage
winter time. 230V~ 50/60Hz
Designation Characteristics Width in ❚ Pack Cat. ref.

17.5mm qty.
1 channel daily cycle 5 adjustable pre-recorded 1 1 EG010

programs : 6 commutations max
per day (3 ON and 3 OFF)
230V 50/60 Hz
capacity : 20 program steps 3 1 EG110

230V 50/60 Hz
2 channels daily cycle capacity : 20 program steps to 3 1 EG210

EG071 be divided between the
2 channels
230V 50/60 Hz
1 channel weekly cycle capacity : 20 program steps 1 1 EG071

230V 50/60 Hz
capacity : 20 program steps 3 1 EG170

230V 50/60 Hz
capacity : 56 program steps 2 1 EG103B

output : 1 changeover contact
μ 16A - 250V~ AC1
EG210 version delivered with key EG005 2 1 EG103E
capacity : 56 program steps 2 1 EG103V

output : 1 changeover contact
μ 16A - AC1 - 12/24 V AC/DC
50/60 Hz
2 channels weekly cycle capacity : 20 program steps 3 1 EG270

to be divided between the 2
channels 230v 50/60 Hz
capacity : 56 program steps 2 1 EG203B

output : 2 changeover contacts
μ 16A - 250V~ AC1
EG203E version delivered with key EG005 2 1 EG203E
D.29
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 145

17.5mm qty.
4 channels weekly time switch voltage rating: 230V~ 50/60 Hz 4 1 EG403E

output: 2 changeover contacts +
2NO contacts
10A - 250V ~ AC1
delivered with programming key
EG403E
2 channels yearly time switch voltage rating: 230V~ 50/60 Hz 4 1 EG293B
output: 2 changeover contacts
10A - 250V~ AC1
4 channels yearly time switch voltage rating: 230V~ 50/60 Hz 4 1 EG493E

output: 3 changeover contacts
10A - 250V~ AC1
1NO contact: 10A - 250V ~ AC1
delivered with programming key
Programming key for EG403E, EG293B, EG493E 1 EG007
for EG103 / EG203 1 EG005

EG493E
clock key 1 EG004
Range module 1 EG006
EG004
Interface and software with software on CD 1 EG003
with USB 1 EG003U
EG006
D.30
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 146
EG010 EG110 EG210 EG071 EG170 EG270 EG470

Width in ❚ 17.5mm 1 3 3 1 3 3 5
Version daily daily daily weekly weekly weekly weekly
voltage supply 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V
+15/-15% +15/-15% +15/-15% +15/-15% +15/-15%
50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz
consumption 1VA 20VA

output changeover contact
Switching capacity
AC1 16A/250V
inductive load (cos = 0.6) 3A/250V
incandescent lamps 1000W
Characteristics
accuracy +/- 1 sec per day
supply failure reserve Lithium battery total of three years
manual override permanent permanent ON/OFF permanent permanent ON/OFF
ON/OFF temporary ON/OFF ON/OFF temporary ON/OFF
Environment
2
connection 0.5 to 4mm
EG103B/E EG203B/E EG493E EG293B EG403E

Width in ❚ 17.5mm 2 2 4 4 4
Cycle weekly weekly yearly yearly weekly
Channels 1 2 4 2 4
Program step 56 56 300 300 300
Min. switching time 1 min 1 min
voltage supply 230V 230V
+15%/-15% +15%/-15%
50/60Hz 50/60Hz
consumption max 6VA < 2VA
output changeover contact 2 changeover 2 changeover 2 changeover
2 NO contacts 2 NO contacts
Switching capacity
AC1 μ16A/250V μ10A/250V
inductive load (cos = 0.6) μ10A/250V
halogen lighting 230V 2300W 1500W
compensated fluo. tubes // 400W, C=45μF 400W, C=45μF
non compensated fluo. tubes 1000W 800W
compact fluorescent tubes 500W 400W
min. load switching 100mA/250V 100mA/250V
Characteristics
accuracy ± 1,5 second per day + 0,2 second per day
supply failure reserve lithium battery : 5 years
manual override permanent ON/OFF
temporary ON/OFF
Environment
ingress protection IP20 IP20
working temperature -5 to 45°C -10 to +45°C
storage temperature -20 to +70°C -20 to +70°C
2
connection flexible: 1 to 6mm
2 2
rigid: 1.5 to 10mm 0,75 to 2,5mm
D.31
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 147
Electrical connections
EG010 5 pre-registered programs:
Ph Display :
N 1. Time
2. Ouput contact (ON or OFF)
3. Program selected
Buttons :
4. To select the program to
apply
5. To scroll program steps
6. Reset
7. + and - : change time
settings
EG071
Ph Display :
N 1. Time
2. Circuit status
3. Days
Buttons :
4. To select the program to
apply
5. To scroll program steps
6. Reset
7. + and - : change time
settings
EG010 EG071
voltage supply 230V ±10% 50/60Hz
consumption 1 VA
output 1 changeover contact, 16A - 250V AC, 3A - 250V cos = 0,6, 1000W incandescent lighting
Functional characteristics
number of programs 5 adjustable pre-recorded programs 20 program steps (each program step can be applied to
one of several days)
accuracy ± 6 min per year
supply failure reserve total of 3 years
Environment
working temperature -10°C to +50°C
storage temperature -10°C to +60°C
Cable capacity 1 to 4mm2
Main characteristics 5 programs are pre-recorded. The user just has to select
the program which corresponds to its use and modify
time switches if necessary
EG170
Ph
Display :
N
1. Time
2. Circuit status (ON or OFF)
3. Day of the week (1=Monday,
2= Tuesday,...)
Buttons :
4. Mode selector : to select
one of the following modes :
- time setting
- programming
- running mode
- manual override
5. “1” to “7” : selection of the days
6. “ON/OFF” : chooses whether
the circuits is ON or OFF.
7. “+” and “-” : changes settings
8. “enter” : to confirm selection
9. “reset”
D.32
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 148
Technical specifications Main characteristics
Electrical characteristics - product delivered and updated to current date

- supply : 230 V AC ±15 % - automatic change of time schedule summer: winter /
- frequency : 50/60 Hz - programming key:
- consumption : max. 6 VA at 50 Hz for temporary override
- output :1 changeover contact voltage free (EG103B and EG103E) for the copy or the saving of the programme
2 changeover contacts voltage free (EG203B and EG203E) - programming per day or group of days
- max. breaking capacity : - 56 programmes steps ON, OFF
AC1 : μ16A 250 V or impulse : 1 sec to 30 mn. (EG103E and EG203E)
DC1 : μ4A 12 V ... - permanent priority ON or OFF ( fixes),
Cos Ê = 0,6 : μ10A 250 V - temporary overrides ON or OFF ( blinking),
incandescent lamps :2300 W - holidays mode : priority setting ON or OFF between two dates
halogen lamps : 230 V : 2300 W (EG103E and EG203E) ,
compensated fluorescent lamps // (max. 45μF) : 400 W - presence simulation (EG103E and EG203E)
non compensated fluorescent lamps, compensated in series : - bargraph with daily profile display,
1000 W fluo compact lamps : 500 W - possibility of locking the keyboard
- min. breaking capacity : - programmable power off
AC1 : 100 mA 250 V - backlighted screen (EG103E and EG203E),
DC1 : 100 mA 12 V ... - remote controled temporary overrides (EG103E).
- galvanic insulation between supply and output
Product presentation
- programming capacity : 56 steps shared on the 2 channels for menu : selection of the operating
EG203B and EG203E mode
- min. time between 2 steps : 1 minute auto : functioning according to the
- accuracy : ± 1,5 sec / 24h established program
- supply failure reserve : lithium battery total of 5 years of supply prog : new for the programming
failure prog : modif to modify an existing
- the product switches to watching state (display lighted of) after program
1 min without power. It returns into Auto mode at return of : checking of the program
power or by push on a button : modification of the hour, the
- ingress protection : IP20 date and the choice of the
mode of change of the time
Environment schedule summer/winter /
- working temperature : -5 to +45 °C : holidays (EG103E and EG203E)
- storage temperature : -20 to +70 °C + and -: navigation or adjustment of
the values in Auto mode, selection of
Connection by cage terminals priority settings, overrides or of random
- flexible : 1 to 6mm2 functioning (EG103E and EG203E)
- rigid : 1,5 to 10mm2 ok : to validate the blinking info
: return at the preceding step
You can return in Auto mode at any time with the menu key. If no action
is made during 1 min, the switch returns into Auto mode.
Reset :
- of programme : it can be completely delated by simultaneous push on
the 3 following keys : menu, ok and . the hour and the date are
maintained
- Total : by simultaneous push on menu and ok keys and , the whole
content of the product is removed. After a total reset, it is necessary to
redefine the hour and the date.
Electrical connection
EG103B EG103E EG203E / EG203B

Ph Ph Ph
N
temporary
override
Utilisation
D.33
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 149
digital time switch

EG493E yearly programmer
EG493E programmer Presentation
- supply : 230 V +10 -15% 50/60 Hz
- consumption <2 VA
- output : 2 changeover switches and 2 normally open contact
μ10 A - 250 V AC1
Keyboard
- annual cycle menu + ok
- programming capacity : 300 program steps ode &
- functioning precision : ± 0,2 sec / day p Validation
Environment
enter in program mode and selection of the days of the
- working temperature : -10 at +45 °C
return to previous step week:
- storage temperature : -20 at +70 °C
1 = monday
navigation and value setting 2 = tuesday
Connection capacity :
2 ...
0,75 to 2,5mm
validation 7 = sunday
manual override: PIN number locking

- auto
- random
Main characteristics - temporary override
- permanent override
• Programming
- Large display with programming instructions.
- 300 program steps (Basic weekly program, 9 sub-programs,
specific program step, additional program step.).
- Advanced functions :
- Easter function : the clock calculates each year the new date of Electrical connection
events linked to easter. LPh
- Day of the week function : the clock calculates each year the new NN
date in order to match the day of the week (ex : 2nd Sunday of
March)
• Automatic change summer / winter

pre-defined or customized settings
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
• Programming key (copy, save, override)
C D
• Additional characteristics
A B
- The output can be defined as ON, OFF, impulse or Cyclic
operating. 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
- Hours counter on each output

- Key board locking via PIN code
- 1 button per chanel for manual override
(permanent, temporary or random)
- 1 input for external override
(changeover, permanent ON or OFF, random, time limited..)
• Casing
- 4 modules
- Connection with Quick Connect terminals.
- 2 changeover and 2 NO contacts (10A-AC1)
D.34
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 150
time lag switches
These devices are designad to The device includes a 2-position Features : Conform to standards :
save energy and ensure safety. override switch for permanent or - long service life NFC 61-113
For example : for building stair- time-switched lighting. - quiet operation IEC 60-669
case or cellar lighting, Automatic recognition of con- - high quiescent current for EN 55014
ventilation, pumping, etc... nection type (3 or 4 wires). control by lighted pushbutton
Time delay is set by means of a (100mA)
For impulse control of lamps cir- potentiometer located on the (see technical characteristics)
cuit with automatic opening after front face.
preset time period.
DesignationType Characteristics Width in ❚ Pack Cat.Ref.

17.5mm qty.
Double time delay time-switch 1 NO Power supply voltage : 1 6 EMN001

230 V 50/60 Hz
30 sec. to 10 min.
adjustable 16 A - 250 V AC1
with recycling possible 2300 W incandescent
Double time delay time-switch 1 NO Power supply voltage : 1 6 EMN003

230 V 50/60 Hz
Short press
30 sec. to 10 min. 16 A - 250 V AC1
adjustable 2300 W incandescent
EMN003
with recycling possible
Long press (> 3 s)

fixed 1 hour
with interruption possible
Remote-controlled 1 NO Power supply voltage : 1 1 EPS450

time-switch 230 V 50 / 60 Hz
or 8 to 24 V AC / DC
Serves as an interruptible
time-switch 16 A - 250 V AC1
1000 W incandescent
Adjustable : 5 min. to 1 h with
adjustment possible Indicator light of status
permanent latching-relay display
EPS450
D.35
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 151
time lag switches
Technical specifications Product description

EMN001 EMN005
Timers
Electrical characteristics EMN001N / EMN005
Supply voltage 230V +10-15% 230V ± 15 %
50 / 60 Hz 50 / 60 Hz
Consumption 1 VA 1 VA
1
8 10
Cut-off power : 6
4
2
- AC1 16 A 250 V 16 A 250 V L
2 mi n
3
- Incandescence 2300 W 2300 W
N 4
- Halogen 230 V 2300 W 2300 W
- Ferromagnetic transformer 1600 W 1600 W override lever ON or time
- Compensated parallel fluorescent Cap 112F, 1000W Cap 112F, 1000W delayed
- Series compensated fluorescent 3600 W 3600 W
- Electronic transformer 2300 W 2300 W time setting potentiometer
- Fluorescent compact with ballast :
- Electronic 460 W 460 W
- Traditional 2300 W 2300 W
Time delay 30 s to 10 min. 30 s to 10 mn/1h
Quiescent current (max) 100 mA 100 mA
Environment
Operating temperature -10 to +55°C
Connection
2 2
Flexible 1.0 to 6 mm 2 1.0 to 6 mm 2
Rigid 1.5 to 10 mm 1.5 to 10 mm
Timer/notice bridging Two 1.5 wires Two 1.5 wires
EMN 001N/EMN005 3-Wire diagram 4-Wire diagram

Ph
Corridor
N
EM001N
ou
EM003
Stairwell
8 10
6
Stairwell
4
2 mi n
L 3
N 4
Timer Timer
N N
Ph
Timer Quiescent
current Timer Quiescent
current
Products EM001N and EM003 identify and interpret automatically
Note : in case of high powers , put a dissipation spacer (LZ060) the types of connection used (3 or 4 wires).
between the switch-off notice and the timer. They perform an automatic time delay cycle at the time of
switch-on.
Operation diagrams
☞ ☞ > 3s > 3s > 3s
T T 1 h
EMN 001 EMN 001
Recycling
of cycle Recycling of Switch-on of Switch-on of one-hour
short cycle one-hour cycle cycle and deliberate
during the short interruption before cycle
cycle end
D.25 D.36
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 152
delay timers
Description Applications Technical data

To provide all types of For timing and automation in Voltage range :
automatic control i.e. lighting, domestic and commercial 12 & 24 to 48V DC
ventilation, watering, machine premises. The input signal can 12 & 24 to 230V AC
pre-heating, automatic door and be via various switching devices Adjustable: time delay from 0.1s
visual audible indication, cycle (pushbutton, latching switch, to 10hrs.
control etc. timeclock etc.) and the timed Led indicator
output used to control the appli-
cation. Complies with EN 60669-2-1
6mm2 max rigid
1.5 - 10mm2 flexible

17.5mm qty.
Delay on 1 c/o contact 1 1 EZN001

10A / 230V~ AC
Cd
Time delay T : 0.1s to 10hr
S
T
Delay off 1 c/o contact 1 1 EZN002

10A / 230V~ AC
Cd Time delay T : 0.1s to 10hr
EZN 001
S
T
Adjustable time on 1 c/o contact 1 1 EZN003

10A / 230V~ AC
Cde time delay T : 0.1s to 10hr
S
T
Timer 1 c/o contact 1 1 EZN004

10A / 230V~ AC
Cd
time delay T : 0.1s to 10hr
S
T
EZN003
Symmetrical flasher 1 c/o contact 1 1 EZN005

10A / 230V~ AC
Cd time delay T : 0.1s to 10hr
S
T
Multifunction 1 c/o contact 1 1 EZN006

6 individual functions 10A / 230V~ AC
including : time delay T : 0.1s to 10hr
delay on
delay off
timer
EZN006
D.37
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 153
delay timers
EZ001 - EZ002 - EZ003 - EZ004 - EZ005 - EZ006

Supply voltage A1 - A2 24-28 Vdc (+10% - 15%) terminals A1 & A2
A1 - A2 24-230 Vac (+10% - 15%) terminals A1 & A2
A3 - A2 12 Vac & dc (+10% -10%) terminals A3 & A2
Output 1 volt free C/O contact
Life expectancy
max load AC1 10A / 230V~ 50,000 cycles
incandescent 450W~ 100,000 cycles
fluorescent non comp. 600W~ 50,000 cycles
inductive load 0.6pf 5A / 230V~ 100,000 cycles
Min power
AC 100mA at 230V
DC 100mA at 12V
Galvanic isolation 2kV
Standard / norm EN60669-2-1
Timer range 0.1s - 10 hours
Min. command period
AC 50ms
DC 30ms
Operating temperature
working -20oC to +50oC
storage -40oC to +50oC
Connection capacity
2
flexible 1.0 - 6 mm
2
rigid 1.5 - 10 mm
Connection
EZ001, EZ003, EZ005, EZ006 (command D,E,F) EZ002, EZ004, EZ006 (command A,B,C)
Ph / + Ph / +
N / - N / -
24V to 230V 24V to 230V
15 In
In
A1/B1 A3/B1
15
15 B1
18 16 A1 A3
15
A2
18 16
18 16
A2
18 16
D.38
D.38
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 154
delay timers
Delay on Delay off

EZ001 & EZ006 function D EZ002 & EZ006 function C
Adjustable time on Impulse timer

EZ003 & EZ006 function E EZ004 & EZ006 function A
Symmetrical flasher Multifunction timer

EZ005 & EZ006 function F EZ006 function A
command (B1)
T T T T T T
output (15-16)
LED
Multifunction timer - 8 individual functions Output relay open - with no command

A = timer.
B = delay off (output relay opens either at end of command or Output relay open - with command signal running
after set time period - which ever is shorter).
C = delay off. Output relay closed - with command signal running
D = delay on.
E = delay on (output relay closes either at end of command or Output relay closed - with command signal removed
after set time period - which ever is shorter).
F = Symmetrical timer. Output relay closed (EZ005)
On selection - contact permanently closed
Off selection - contact permanently open
D.39
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 155
indicator lights
Indicator lights and push buttons LED technology providing longer Connection capacity :
2
life, new design, integrated label - 10 mm rigid,
2
These products are used for holder - 6 mm flexible
remote controlling signalisation
of any event in any electric Comply with IEC 62094-1
installation (domestic, tertiary & (for indicator lights).
industrial)

17.5mm qty.
Single indicator light LED light : green 1 12 SVN121

230 V
red 1 12 SVN122
orange 1 12 SVN123
blue 1 12 SVN124
SVN122 SVN125 SVN121 clear 1 12 SVN125

SVN123 SVN124
Double indicator light LED light: green and red 1 12 SVN126

230 V
clear 1 12 SVN128
Triple indicator light LED light: red/red/red 1 12 SVN127
SVN126 red/orange/green 1 12 SVN129
green/green/green 1 12 SVN221
red/orange/blue 1 12 SVN222
Low voltage indicator lights LED light: green 1 12 SVN131

12 to 48 V
AC/DC red 1 12 SVN132
orange 1 12 SVN133
SVN127
blue 1 12 SVN134
clear 1 12 SVN135
green/red 1 12 SVN136
D.40
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 156
push buttons
Push buttons These versions with indicator Connection capacity :

2
2 versions : lights are equipped with green or - 10 mm rigid,
2
- impulse push buttons red diffuser. (led technology) - 6 mm flexible.
- latching push buttons
Comply with IEC 60947-5-1 for
push buttons and IEC 62094-1 for
indicator lights

17.5mm qty.
Impulse push buttons 16 A - 250 V AC

without indicator light
contact: 1NO 1 12 SVN311
contact: 1NC 1 12 SVN321
contacts: 2NO 1 12 SVN331
contacts: 2NC 1 12 SVN341
contacts: 1NO+1NC 1 12 SVN351

SVN311
contacts: 2NO + green push button 1 12 SVN373
with indicator light :

contact: 1NO green 1 12 SVN411
contact: 1NC red 1 12 SVN422
contacts: 2NO red 1 12 SVN432
SVN391 contacts: 2NC green 1 12 SVN441
contacts: 1NO+1NC red 1 12 SVN452
16 A - 12/48 V AC/DC
with indicator light
contacts: 2NO green 1 12 SVN461
contacts: 2 NO red 1 12 SVN462
SVN411 Latching push buttons 16 A - 250 V AC

without indicator light
contact: 1NO 1 12 SVN312
contact: 1NC 1 12 SVN322
contacts: 2NC 1 12 SVN342
with indicator light :

SVN422 16 A - 250 V AC 1 12 SVN413
contact: 1 NO green
1 12 SVN433
contacts: 2 NO green
16 A - 12/48 V AC
contacts: 2NO green 1 12 SVN463
contacts: 2 NO red 1 12 SVN464
D.41
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 157
push buttons and indicators lights
Electrical and mechanical characteristics
General features
Part number SVN1... / SVN2... SVN4... SVN3...

Designation indicator lights indicator lights push buttons
+ push buttons
indicator lights push buttons
Standard IEC62094-1 IEC60947-5-1
Light technology LED light
Rated insulation voltage 250V
Rated impulse withstand voltage 4kV (2kV for 12-48V version) 4kV
Operational voltage 230V AC (1)
Frequency 50/60Hz
Operational thermal current n/a 16A
Operational current @ 230V AC12 n/a 16A
Operational current @230V AC14 n/a 10A
LED power 0,8W (230V) 0,33W (48V) 0,08W (24V)
0,018W (12V)
LED consumption 3,45mA (230V) 6,9mA (48V) 3,3mA (24C) 9,7mA (48VDC)4,6mA (24VDC)
1,5mA (12C) 2,1mA (12VDC)
Conditional short circuit current n/a 1000A with gl 10A fuse

IP class IP2X
Degree of pollution 3
Connecting
Type of connection cage terminals
Connection capacity with flexible cable 0,75mm2 to 6mm2
Connction capacity with rigid cable 0,75m2 to 10m2
Terminal tightening torque mini : 1,3Nm ; Max 2Nm : advised 1,65Nm rigid and 1,8Nm supple
Case material Thermoplastic (Polyamide) comply with IEC 695-2-2
Mechanical characteristics
Electric endurance in number of cycles n/a 15000 (AC12); 6000 (AC14)
Mechanical endurance in no. of operations n/a 15000
Life time 100000 h
Operating temperature -20 to +50°C
Climat environment all climates
Protection index IP 20
Height 2000 m
Installation
Mounting DIN rail EN50.022-35
Mounting position performances not afffected if installed vertically, horizontally or flat
(1) except 12 to 48V indicator light (SVN131, SVN132, SVN133, SVN134, SVN135)
D.42
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 158
transformers, bells and buzzers
Description Connection capacities : 6mm2 Note : the transformers have a

Transformers ensure an electrical Cable clamp type higher no load voltage. The
separation between primary and Output: stated voltages correspond to
secondary circuits. Bells: 85 dBA the voltages on nominal load.
They provide extra safety low Buzzers: 78 dBA
voltage 8, 12, 24V~
When a bell transformer is
Technical data installed in an enclosure with
Secondary voltages: mains voltage equipment, 230V
8V, 12V, 24V~ cable should be used on the
Bell transformers are secondary side of the
short-circuit protected. transformer or extra low voltage
Bells/buzzers: cable should be sheathed within
Max. continuous duty the enclosure.
< 30 minutes.

17.5mm qty.
Safety transformers 16VA 50/60Hz 4 3 ST313
230V 12-24V~ 25VA 50/60Hz 4 3 ST312

50/60Hz
40VA 50/60Hz 4 1 ST314
60VA 50/60Hz 6 2 ST315
ST313
Bell transformers 230V/8V~50/60Hz 2 6 ST301

4VA - 8-12V : 0.33A
230V/8-12V~ 50/60Hz 2 6 ST303

8VA - 8V : 1A
12V : 0.67A
230V/8-12V~ 50/60Hz 3 4 ST305

16VA - 8V : 2A
12V : 1.33A
ST301 24V : 0.67A
Bells 8/12V~ 1 12 SU212

4VA - 0.35A
230V~ 1 12 SU213
6.5VA - 0.03A
SU212
Buzzers 8/12V~ 1 12 SU214

4VA - 0.35A
230V~ 1 12 SU215
6.5VA - 0.03A
SU214
D.43
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 159
transformers
Safety transformers
These transformers are designed to ensure personal safety, their
primary winding are electrically separated from their secondary 230 V 24 V
windings and they are intended to feed safety extra low voltage
circuits U ≤ 50V. A thermal overload, in the primary windings,
ensures that if a short circuit or an overload occurs in the output it
will not damage the device.
Bell transformers
Bell transformers are similar to safety transformers but the
secondary voltages do not exceed 24 volts, they are also similarly
protected against short circuits and overloads, by thermal protection
in the primary winding.
U2
Compliance with the standards
The bell transformers conform with EN 61558-1 and EN 61558-2-8. U1 U3
The safey transformers conform with EN 61558-1 and EN 61558-2-8
Technical specification
Reference ST301 ST303 ST305 ST312 ST313 ST314 ST315
Nominal power 4VA 8VA 16VA 25VA 16VA 40VA 60VA
Designation bell bell bell safety safety safety safety
Primary voltage 230 volts 230 volts 230 volts 230 volts 230 volts 230 volts 230 volts
Secondary voltage U2 8 volts 8 volts 8 volts 12 volts 12 volts 12 volts 12 volts
In = 0.33A In = 1A In = 2A In = 2.08A In = 1.33A In = 3.33A In = 5.25A
U3 12 volts 12 volts 12 volts 24 volts 24 volts 24 volts 24 volts
In = 0.5A In = 0.67A In = 1.33A In = 1.04A In = 0.67A In = 1.67A In = 2.63A
No load U2 12 volts 15 volts 12.4 volts 14 volts 15.5 volts 13.7 volts 13.6 volts
Secondary voltage U3 18 volts 21.8 volts 18.5 volts 29 volts 29.7 volts 26.5 volts 27 volts
Galvanic insulation 4kV 4kV 4kV 4kV 4kV 4kV 4kV
Max functional temperature 35°C 35°C 35°C 35°C 35°C 35°C 35°C
Overload and S/C protection thermal cut out in the primary winding
D.44
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 160
thermostats
Description Application In case of probe disconnection, Electronic thermostat suitable for

Electronic thermostats for any Several probes can be 3 working modes are possible heating control
application requesting associated, according to the (selected by wiring) : Two adjustable temperature
temperature control (from cold application. example : 1. permanent off levels are selected by external
room to steam room). EK 081 fixed ambient probe for 2. permanent on signals (operation by time switch
night temperature regulation. 3. cyclical operation 1 minute in or digital programmer).
EK 083 probe used as floor every four. Additionally there is an
probe to limit floor temperature. adjustable low level for frost
EK 083 probe (with its collar) for The position of the relay is protection. In the event of probe
the control of hot water circuit. displayed by a pilot light. disconnection the heating
system is switched on one
minute in every four.

17.5mm qty.
Multi-range thermostats Voltage rating : 230V~ 50/60Hz 3 1 EK186

delivered without probe output : 1 changeover contact
to associate with EK 081 2A - 230V~
and EK 083 probes. 4 ranges :
-30 to 0°C
0 to +30°C
+30 to +60°C
+60 to +90°C
to associate with contactors
EK186
Multi-order thermostat Voltage rating : 3 1 EK187

delivered without probe 230V~ - 50/60 Hz
to associate with EK 081 output: 1 changeover contact
and EK 082 probes 2A - 230V~
temperature level 1 (comfort)
adjustable 5 - 30°C
temperature level 2 (night setting)
accuracy ±0.2°C adjustable 2 - 8°C less than

level 1 setting
temperature level 3 (frost setting)
EK187
adjustable 5 - 30°C
to associate with contactors
Fixed ambient probe Can be associated with : 1 EK081

EK 186, EK 187 thermostats
EG 502 programmable
thermostat
EK081
Adjustable ambient probe Can be associated with : 1 EK082

the probe is equipped with EK 187 thermostat
a potentiometer for the EG 502 programmable
correction of the thermostat
temperature (±3°C)
EK082
Universal probe Can be associated with : 1 EK083

removable collar EK 186 thermostat
EK083
D.45
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 161
EK 186 multi-range thermostat
Electrical characteristics • Multiple applications

- voltage supply: 230V + 10 - 15% 50/60 Hz a single device to solve all your problems of regulation or
- consumption: 1.5VA temperature control, from cold room to incubator.
- output: 1 changeover contact
2A 230V AC1 • Varying accuracy
Functional characteristics the accuracy can be adapted according to the application.
- 4 temperature ranges : e.g.: low for ambient temperature regulation, high for incubator
-30 to 0ºC regulation.
0 to +30ºC
+30 to +60ºC • Safety feature for probe failure
+60 to +90ºC to protect the installation in case of disconnection from the
- varying accuracy probe.various connections can be made so the thermostat will be
Environment - permanent OFF
- working temperature: –10 to +50ºC - permanent ON
- storage temperature: –20 to +70ºC - cyclical operation: output ON 1 minute in every 4.
Connection capacity
- flexible: 1.0 to 6 mm2 • Display
- rigid: 1.5 to 10 mm2 of state of output.
- probe: maximum distance 50m
Product presentation Electrical connection
15 -30
2 10 20 0
5 25 30 1
1 1 3 5 7 9
0 30 60
2 90
3 3
4 EK 186
EK 186
2 4 6 8 10
1 selection of the temperature range.

2 adjustment of the temperature setting.
3 selection of accuracy. EK 081
4 display of state of output. EK 083
Working principle
the EK 186 regulates the temperature according to all or nothing Choice of the safety feature for probe failure
principle, it can be associated with different probes, according to the
application the accuracy is a function of the temperature
EK 186
range and is selected by a slide switch. 2 4 6 8 10
Position on the temperature range ºC

slide switch –30 to 0 0 to 30 30 to 60 60 to 90
1 ± 2.15* ± 2.54 ± 2.98 ± 3.43
2 ± 0.15 ± 0.18* ± 0.21 ± 0.24
3 ± 0.38 ± 0.45 ± 0.53* ± 0.61
permanent ON Without shunt permanent OFF
4 ± 1.23 ± 1.45 ± 1.70 ± 1.96* e.g. coldroom to e.g. heating e.g. incubator to
* bold : preferential accuracies for each temperature range. continue to to protect avoid permanent
generate cold installations from heating of
frost during winter incubator
Example of choice of accuracy Caution

- regulation of ambient temperature when the temperature ranges 30 to 60ºC and 60 to 90ºC are
range : 0 to +30ºC selected and if the temperature measured by the probe is below
accuracy : ± 0.18ºC = 2 30ºC, the safety feature for probe failure must be “permanent on”,
- control of hot water outgoing circuit until the measured temperature reaches the minimum temperature
range : 30 to +60ºC corresponding to the range (i.e. 30ºC for the range 30°C to 60ºC
accuracy : ± 0.53ºC = 3 and 60ºC for the range 60°C to 90ºC).
D.46
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 162
EK 187 multi-setting thermostat
Electrical characteristics • Temperature settings controllable by external setting when

- voltage supply: 230V + 10 - 15% 50/60 Hz associating a digital time switch, it is possible to regulate the
- consumption: 1.5VA heating in relation with a program established by the user
- output: 1 changeover contact
2A 230V ;AC1 • 2 wires link between the probe and the unit, enables the easy
replacement of the ambient thermostats of an existing installation
- 3 temperature controllable by external setting • Safety feature for “probe failure” in case of probe
• comfort: adjustable from +5 tp +30ºC disconnection,the output will be switched 1 minute in every 4: so
• reduced: decrease 2 to 8ºC in comparion with comfort setting that in case of disconnection during winter, it will protect the
• dispensation: adjustable from +5 tp +30ºC installation from frost
- 3accuracy: +/- 0.2ºC
• Display of the output and of the setting
Environment
- working temperature: –10 to +50ºC
- storage temperature: –20 to +70ºC
Connection capacity
- flexible: 1.0 to 6 mm2
- rigid: 1.5 to 10 mm2
- probe: maximum distance 50m
Product presentation Working principle
EK187 adjusts the temperature under the “all or nothing” principle it

is associated to an ambient probe and thus works in closed loop the
temperature settings are selected by external settings (contacts free
of ptential)
EK187 is thus generally associated tota time switch or a digital time
switch.
In the case of absence of external signal, EK187 regulates the
heating in comparison with the reference setting, a switch enables
the override of the dispensation setting.
1 reference setting: comfort Tº

2 decrease in comparison with reference setting: reduced to Tº
3 despensation setting
4 despensation setting override
5 display of state of output i.e. contact position
6 pilot light indicating the regulation in comparison with a
dispensation setting
7 pilot light indicating the regulation in comparison with a reduced
setting
D.47
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 163
EK 081 - EK 082 - EK 083 probes
• Associated with EK186
2 4 6 8 10
EK 083
EK083 Universal probe • Associated with EK187 - EK618
- To associate with EK186 thermostat

- To associate with EK187 thermostat (for those applications insert
in series with the probe a resistance of 1500Ω) 2 4 6 8 10
EK 083: 10 kOhms at 25ºC
cable length: 4m
Environment
- Working temperature: -30 to +90ºC
- Stocking temperature: -30 to +100ºC
R 1500 EK 083
Examples of applications
Use with the clamp collar Use without the clamp collar • used as an external probe in a
• for the control of hot water • protected by a sheath for the control of weatherproof box
floor temperature
insulating
probe
sheath
heating
frame
hot
water
probe
Resistance of probes according to temperature
Temperature EK083 EK081 * EK081 **

EK082
T (ºC) R (kΩ) R (kΩ) R (kΩ)
+ 90 0.91 on a wall
+ 80 1.25 1.25 2.83
+ 70 1.75 1.75 3.33
+ 50 3.60 3.60 5.18
+ 30 8.06 8.06 9.64
+ 25 10 10 11.58
+ 20 12.49 12.49 14.07
+ 15 15.71 15.71 17.28
+ 10 19.90 19.90 21.48
+ 05 25.39 25.39 26.98
+ 00 32.65 32.65 34.23
–5 42.31
– 10 55.29
– 15 72.89 face value at 25ºC
– 20 96.97 Note: *association with EK186
**association with EK187 and EK618
– 25 130.24
– 30 176.68
D.48
D.48
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 164
EK 081 - EK 082 - EK 083 probes
EK081 fixed ambient probe
in association with in association with

27 thermostat EK186 thermostat EK187
a a
81
switch a up switch a down

81
The EK081 can be associated with : environment :

- EK186 multi-range thermostat working temperature : 0 to +80 °C
- EK187 multi-order thermostat storage temperature : -30 to +100 °C
EK082 adjustable ambient probe

Adjustements
27 b a The potentiometer p allows the

c thermostat to be adjusted.
- position “a” : set position
- position “b” : -3 °C
81 - position “c” : +3 °C
p
81
The EK082 can be associated with :

- EK187 multi-order thermostat
Installation
on a wall seal the

sheath
1
2
60 2,5 mm
D.49
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 165
analogue voltmeters, ammeters
Analogue voltmeters Connection capacity : Direct reading :

For indications of line or phase Rigid conductor 10mm2 SM005 : 0 - 5A
voltages Flexible conductor 6mm2 SM015 : 0 - 15A
SM030 : 0 - 30A
- Single phase : Analogue ammeters
direct connection For indications of AC currents Indirect reading via current
- Three phase : transformers :
use of a voltmeter selector 50, 100, 150, 250, 400, 600A
switch SK602
IEC60054-1
Frequency : 50/60Hz

17.5mm qty.
Voltmeter Accuracy : 1.5% 4 1 SM500

consumption : 2.5VA
0 - 500V
Analog ammeter Accuracy : 1.5%

consumption : 2.5VA
0 - 5A 4 1 SM005
SM500 0 - 15A 4 1 SM015
0 - 30A 4 1 SM030
Analog ammeter Accuracy : 1.5%

current transformer
operated 0 - 50A 4 1 SM050
0 - 100A 4 1 SM100
0 - 150A 4 1 SM150
0 - 250A 4 1 SM250
SM030 0 - 400A 4 1 SM400
0 - 600A 4 1 SM600
D.50
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 166
voltmeters, ammeters
Analogue voltmeter and ammeter Voltmeters range
Technical specifications cat. ref. scale reading

SM005 0-5A direct
SM015 0-15A direct
- direct reading voltmeter : 300V and 500V for 50/60Hz
- direct reading ammeter : 5A, 15A, 30A SM030 0-30A direct
- ammeter with CT : CT/5A SM050 0-50A via CT/5A
- consumption : voltmeter: 3VA/ammeter : 1.1VA
- isolating voltage : 2kV SM100 0-100A via CT/5A
SM150 0-150A via CT/5A
Environment
- working T°: 23°C ± 10°C class = 2 SM250 0-250A via CT/5A
- working T°: -10°C to +50°C class > 2 SM400 0-400A via CT/5A
- storage T°: -30°C to +75°C
SM600 0-600A via CT/5A
Connection capacity
2
- flexible : 1 to 6 mm
2
- rigid : 1.5 to 10 mm
Voltmeters range
cat. ref. scale reading
SM500 0-500V direct
Electrical connection Electrical connection

CT*
R R
S
T S * current transformer
N see below
T
N
ammeter
voltmeter
3 11 9
0
1 3 5 7 9 0 50
A
0 L1 L3
200 300 400
L1L2 L1 0 100 500
SK 603 L2 SM 050
V
L2L3 L2
L3L1 L3 4 10 2
SK 602 SM 500
2 4 6 8 10 2 4
Current transformers (CT)

- primary current: 50 to 600A (depend. on model) secondary current: 5A
- frequency: 50/60Hz
Range of CT’s
SR051: 50/5A SR200: 200/5A SR400: 400/5A
SR101: 100/5A SR250: 250/5A SR600 : 600/5A
SR151: 150/5A SR300: 300/5A
28 77 46
56
43
84 107
29
68
46
64
D.51
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 167
digital voltmeters, ammeters, current transformers
Digital voltmeters Digital ammeters Comply with IEC 60054-1

SM501 SM 020, SM 151, SM 401,
For indications of line or phase SM 601
voltages SM 020 : direct reading
SM 401, SM 601 : reading via a
- Three phase : current transformer (see below)
use of a voltmeter selector
switch SK 602

17.5mm qty.
Digital voltmeters Voltage rating : 4 1 SM501

220/230V; 50/60Hz
accuracy : ±1%
consumption : 4VA
scale : 0 - 500V
Digital ammeters Voltage rating :

220/230V; 50/60Hz
accuracy : ±1%
consumption : 4VA
SM501 - Direct Scale : 0-20A 4 1 SM020
- Reading via CT150/5A Scale : 0-150A 4 1 SM151

(SR 151)
- Reading via CT 400/5A Scale : 0-400A 4 1 SM401

(SR 400)
- Reading via CT 600/5A Scale : 0-600A 4 1 SM601

(SR 600)
SM020
current transformers (C.T.)

Description : Their current on secondary can be mounted on copper bar can be mounted on DIN rail with
Current transformers are used to circuit (0-5A) is proportional to or on cable adaptors
feed analogue and digital the current on primary circuit
ammeters. As well as kWh class : 1
meters.

qty.
Current transformers (CT) Ratio :

50/5 1 SR051
100/5 1 SR101
150/5 1 SR151
200/5 1 SR200
250/5 1 SR250
300/5 1 SR300
SR300
400/5 1 SR400
600/5 1 SR600
D.52
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 168
selector switches
Description Connection capacity: Complies with IEC 947-3 and 60

To provide command signals or - rigid conductor: 1.5 to 10mm2 947-3
program selection in electrical - flexible conductor: 1 to 6mm2
control schemes.
Isolating voltage 500V~
Application: Nominal current 10-20A
For domestic and commercial
installations.

17.5mm qty.
1 pole selector switch 1 contact o/c 3 1 SK600

0
20A 400V~
1 3 1 2
Non spring return
2 pole selector switch 2 contacts NC/NO 3 1 SK601

0
20A 400V~
1 2
SK602 1 3 5 7
with return to position
when not actioned
2 6
Selector switch for 20A 400V~ 3 1 SK602

voltmeters
7 positions
1 3
V
L1 L1 L2 0 L1
L2 L2 L3 L2
L3
N L3 L1 L3
10 6 2 12
SK603 Selector switch for 20A 400V~ 3 1 SK603

ammeters or with current
4 positions transformers / 5A
11 9
A
L1 0
L2
L3 L1
L3
3 4 10 2
L2
Step selector switch 20A 400V~ 3 1 SK604
2 3 4
5 37 1
1
2 0
SK606
Key selector switch 10A 400V~ 3 1 SK606
0
1 3
1 1
2 4
0
Spare key for SK606 1 SK001
D.53
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 169
digital voltmeters, ammeters,

current transformers
Technical specifications Connection

2 2
- supply voltage : 230 V 50/60 Hz - resolution : 1 digit - flexible : 6 mm - rigid : 10 mm
- reading refresh : 3 / second
- impedance input > 1 M for voltmeter SM 501 Environment
- insulation resistance : 10 M - operating temperature : -10 to +55 °C
- maximum applicable voltage : 660 V - storage temperature : -40 to +70 °C.
- number of digits : 3 for SM020 to SM601, 3 x 4 for SM001.
reference description range con- acurracy reference accuracy acceptable acceptble Frequency Insulation
sumption % tempera- variation / °C permanent overload Hz voltage
ture / °c overload
SM501 voltmeter 500 V ≤ 4,5 VA 1 23 1°C 0,03% / °C 1,2 Un 2 Un/5 sec. 45 - 65 2 kV/50 Hz-1 min
SM020 direct reading 0 - 20 A ≤ 1 VA 1 23 1°C 0,03% / °C 1,2 In 10 In/5 sec. 45 - 65 2 kV/50 Hz-1 min
ammeter
SM151 ammeter for 0 - 150 A ≤ 1 VA 1 23 1°C 0,03% / °C 2 In 10 In/5 sec. 45 - 65 2 kV/50 Hz-1 min
SM401 current 0 - 400 A
transformer
SM601 0 - 600 A
SM001 multimeter 35 to 480 V < 0,5 VA 0,5% ± 1 digit 1,2 In 5 In/1 sec. 40 - 80
5 to 8000 A ≤ 0,5 VA 0,5% ± 1 digit
40 to 80 Hz ± 2 Hz
Electric connections with switches SK602 and SK603
R R
S S
T voltmeter
T N
N
1 3 5 7 9
0
L1L2 L1
ammeter L2L3 L2
L3L1 L3
SK 602 SM 501
2 4 6 8 10 2 4 12 14
1 3 5 7 9
0
L1 L3
L2
SK 603 SM 151/SM 401
2 4 6 8 10 2 4 12 14
power supply
230 V
Schematic diagrams
for SM001 (multimeter) for SM020 (direct measurement ammeter)
L1 L1
do not connect
L2 L2 T.I. to the ground
L3 L3
SM 020
2 4 12 14
N N
0/20A
circuit to be 230 V
1 3 5 7 9 11 13
ent ér e courant measured
power supply
ent ér e t ens i on
N L1 L2 L3
2 4 6 8 10 12 14
400 V supply
230 V supply
0
230 or 400 V auxiliary supply
for SM501 (voltmeter) for SM151, SM401, SM601 (CT measurement ammeter)
SM 501 SM 151/SM 401

2 4 12 14 2 4 12 14
circuit to be
measured 0/500 V 230 V circuit to be 230 V
measured
power supply power supply
D.54
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 170
multi-function meters
Description Common equipments:

Multi-function meter measures - reactive positive power total in - backlit LCD screen,
the extent of electrical values for instant and maximum value, - direct access key for currents
all LV or LV/HV networks. It - apparent positive power total (instantaneous and max. values),
allows starting from the front in instant and maximum value, current THD and set up wiring
panel to configure and display all - power factor (PF) total with correction,
the electric parameters and to inductive or capacitive indication - direct access key for voltages,
exploit the functions of - harmonic distortion rate (THD) frequency and voltage THD,
measurement, metering and up to 51 on phase-to-neutral - direct access key for active,
energies management, and phase-to-phase voltages reactive and apparent power
harmonics analysis, remote and currents (THD 3U, THD 3V, (instantaneous and max. values)
control and control state of THD 3I) and power factor,
control devices, communication - direct access key for energies
and detection of high voltages, Energies meters and hour meters.
peaks and voltage - positive active energy meter
disconnections. This device is a - positive reactive energy meter Connection capacity:
multi-function meter for - programmable hour run meter - voltage: rigid or flexible
measuring electrical values for conductors 2,5 mm2
single, two and three phase low SM103E: - current: rigid or flexible
and high voltage networks. - Same measures as for SM102E conductors 6 mm2
with average values,
SM102E: - active and reactive power on 4 Comply with IEC 61 557-12, IEC
measurement in real effective quadrants (±), 62 053-22 class 0.5 S and IEC
values (TRMS) of: - harmonic distortion rate (THD) 62 053-23 class II
- current per phase and neutral up to 51 on phase-to-neutral
in instant and maximum value, and phase-to-phase voltages
- phase-to-neutral and and currents (THD 3U, THD 3V,
phase-to-phase voltages, In THD 3I, THD In),
instant,
- frequency, In instant, Metering:
- active positive power total in - active and reactive power
instant and maximum value, meter on 4 quadrants,
- apparent power meter,
- programmable hour run meter.
Low voltage multi-function meters measures of instantaneous SM102E

and maximum values
Low and high voltage measures of instantaneous, average SM103E

multi-function meters and maximum values
and network analyser
Pulse output module for meter SM102E SM200

SM102E 2 pulse outputs cable for with 1 adjustable output
configuration (kWh, kvarh,kVah)
for meter SM103E SM201 SM201
with 2 adjustable outputs
Input / output module for meter SM103E SM202 SM202

2 inputs, 2 outputs cable for (3 modules max. can be connected)
configuration on various
measures
Analogue outputs module for meter SM103E SM203

SM103E 2 outputs cable for (2 modules max. can be connected)
configuration on various
measures
D.55
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 171
multi-function meters
SM102E SM103E
Current measurement on insulated inputs (TRMS)
CT primary 10 000 A 10 000 A
CT secondary 5A 1 and 5 A
Measurement range 0-11 kA
Input consumption 0.6 VA ≤ 0.1 VA
Accuracy 0.2 %
Sustained overload 6A
Intermittent overload 10 x In for 1 s
Voltage measurement (TRMS)
Direct measurement between phases 50 - 500 V 18 - 700 V
Direct measurement between phases and neutral 28 - 289 V 11 - 404 V
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Input consumption ≤ 0,1 VA
Accuracy 0.2 %
Power measurement accuracy 0.5 %
Power factor measurement accuracy 0.5 %
Frequency measurement range 45 - 65 Hz
Frequency measurement accuracy 0.1 %
Active energy accuracy class 0.5 S
Reactive energy accuracy class 2
Measurement updating period 1s
Copper conductor connection capacity flexible or rigid: 2,5 mm 2
- voltage flexible or rigid: 6 mm2
- current
Auxiliary
Power supply
- AC voltage 110 - 400 V AC ± 10 %
- DC voltage 120 - 350 V DC ± 20 %, 12 - 48 V DC -6 to +20 %
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Consumption ≤ 10 VA
Dimensions
92
92
96
20
60 96
D.56
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 172
energymeters
Description Characteristics - option: tariff 1 / tariff 2.

Energymeters are aimed to - class B - three phases energymeters are
measure the active energy - accuracy 1% adapted to all kind of networks
consumed by an installation. - energy readout: 7 digits - display indication in case of
They permit to have under - backlighted display bad wiring.
control the real cost of an - indication of instantaneous
installation and to divide the power consumption Connection capacity :
consumption between the - total / partial counter - flexible 6 mm2
different appliances. (excepted MID references) - rigid 4 mm2
- pulsed output
- unlimited saving of measures Complies with EN 50 470-3
- LED flashing according to
consumption

17.5mm qty.
Single phase - direct 32A voltage 230V AC 50 / 60Hz

single tariff 1❚ 1 EC050
without pulsed output

single tariff 1❚ 1 EC051
with pulsed output
Single phase - direct 63A voltage 230V AC 50 / 60Hz

starting current = 40mA
base current = 10A
max current = 63A
EC050
with pulsed output 3❚ 1 EC150
and total / partial
with pulsed output, 3❚ 1 EC152

total / partial counter and 2 tariffs
Three phase - direct 63A voltage 230/400V AC 50 / 60Hz

base current = 10A
max current = 63A

and total / partial
EC350 with pulsed output, 4❚ 1 EC352
Three phase - direct 100A voltage 230/400V AC 50 / 60Hz

base current = 20A
max current = 100A

and total / partial

EC370
Three phase - connection via to be connected with CT with
current transformers on the secondary
voltage 230/400V AC 50 / 60Hz
max current on CT secondary = 6A

and total / partial

Hour counters 250V 50Hz 2❚ 1 EC100
EC100
D.57
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 173
energymeters
EC050 EC051 EC150 EC152 EC350 EC352 EC360 EC362 EC370 EC372
Voltage 230V AC +/- 15% 230V AC +/- 15%, 400V AC +/- 15%
Frequency 50 / 60Hz
Consumption 7VA, 1W < 10VA and 1W < 10VA and 3W
Metrological data
Connection direct via current transformer
Display 5 + 1 digits 6 + 1 digits 7 + 1 digits
Accuracy 1%, class 1 IEC1036 1%, class BEN 50 470-3
I max 32A direct 63A direct 100A direct 6A on sec. of CT
I starting 20mA 40mA 80mA 10mA on sec. of CT
Base current 10A 10A 20A 5A
Metrological LED
LED 1000 blinking / hr 500 blinking / hr 1000 blinking / hr
Pulsed output
Pulsed output no 1 pulse = 100Wh / 100ms / 20 - 30V DC max (except on KNX meters)
Tariff
Tariff 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Mechanical characteristics
Width 1❚ 3❚ 4❚ 7❚ 4❚
Protection degree IP20 IP20, IP51 (front part)
Storage temperature -25 to +70°C -20 to +70°C
Operating temperature -10 to +45°C -10 to +55°C
Connection capacity rigid: 1 to 6 mm 2
rigid: 1,5 to 16 mm2 rigid: 2,5 to 35 mm2 rigid: 1,5 to 10 mm2
flexible: 1 to 4 mm2 flexible: 1 to 16 mm2 flexible: 2 to 35 mmm2 flexible: 1 to 6 mm2
Connection diagram Metering for 3 phase network associated with an ammeter and
its phase switch 230 / 400V AC
EC050, EC051 EC350, EC352
EC051
T1/T2 * L2
only T1/T2 * + - L1 L3 N
N + -
- +
1 3 9 1113 15
N 13
prog
reset
reset
2 4 6 8 10 12
2 4 6 8 10 12
L1
L2
L3
* EC352 L1
EC360, EC362 EC370, EC372 L2
L3
T1/T2 * L2 N
T1/T2 * + - L1 L3 N
+ -
* EC 372
1 3 9 1113 15
1357
prog
reset
reset
2 4 6 8 10 12
2 4 6 8 10 12 14
L1
L1 L2
L2
L3 L3
N N
* EC362
D.58
D.58
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 174
Simple and effective

lighting control
Maximising energy savings can be achieved when simple and easy to install devices are utilised to bet-
ter manage the use of lighting & HVAC applications.
New and existing building can take steps towards becoming energy efficient by considering the range
of devices that will help drive down household energy costs.
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 175
dimmers ranges overview D61
dimmers D62
dimmers system: 1/10V pilots D64
emergency light module D69
remote controls for emergency

light blocks D69
twilight switches D71
light sensitives switch,

2 channel up to 20000Lux D72
remote telephone interface D76

2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 176
dimmer
ranges overview
functioning as a standalone product functioning in system : association of dimmers

0W 20W 60W 100W 300W 600W 1000W with 1/10V max 30 x 1kW
Incandescent/halogen 230V EV011, EV012 EV102 pilot : switch to “master” position
EV002, EV004
EV100, EV102 switch to “local” position EV102 + n x EV 100 or EV 102 (slave position)
Halogen VLV (12 or 24V) ferromagne- EV011 EV102 pilot : switch to “master” position
tic transformer suitable
for dimming. EV002, EV004
The transformer shouldn’t be used EV100, EV102 switch to “local” position EV102 + n x EV 100 or EV 102 (slave position)
with less than 75% of nominal load
Halogen VLV (12 or 24V) via electronic EV012 EV102 pilot : switch to “master” position
transformer
EV002, EV004
EV100, EV102 switch to “local” position EV102 + n x EV 100 or EV 102 (slave position)
1/10V control (output only) Input 1/10 V, 50 mA

fluo with electroballast 1/10V
EV106
EV108 with scene inputs
300 W 600 W 1000 W Pilot 1/10 V
EV011 EV002 EV100 EV102 EV106 EV108

Technical features EV012 EV004
Controls available
- on the product - yes yes yes yes yes
- external with illuminated pushbutton yes yes yes yes yes yes
- input 1/10 V - - yes (slave) yes (slave) - -
- ambient lighting setting - 1 (EV 004) - 2 levels - 2 levels
Types of outputs :
- direct (capacitive/inductive load) yes yes yes yes - -
- input 1/10 V - - - yes (master) yes yes
Functions :
- protection overheating / overloads yes * yes yes yes yes yes
- level indicator - EV004 - yes yes yes
- memorisation yes yes yes yes yes yes
- softstart yes yes yes yes - -
Parameter setting :
- mini, max. level - EV004 yes yes yes yes
- dimming speed - EV004 - yes yes yes
- speed at start / stop - EV004 - yes yes yes
- transition speed for level call - - - yes yes yes
* EV011 : protection via integrated fuse, electronic protection for other products
System dimmers System dimmers

Dimmers 300 W Universal dimmers 600 W Universal dimmers 1000 W 1-10 V pilots
EV011 EV012 EV002 EV004 EV100 EV102 EV106 EV108
D.61
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 177
dimmers
Description: Dimming controlled by Dimmer 1000 W :

Hager dimmers control the ligh- push button : Several lamps with up to 1000W
ting level of all types of lighting - start / stop by short press power can be driven with the
source: incandescent, LV halo- - increasing / decreasing by same control by associating
gen, VLV halogen with electronic maintaining pressure EV102 (master) with up to 30
or ferromagnetic transformer, EV102 or EV100 (slave), that
LED VLV lamps with electronic Common characteristics : represents a total power of
transformer, fluorescent with - universal dimmers with auto- 30kW.
electronic ballast. matic load recognition
The new generation EVN dim- - Softstart (progressive start) to Dimmers 1-10V :
mers 300W and 500W also allow increase the working life of The lamps equipped with a 1-10 V
the lighting level adjustment for lamps dimmable input, whatever their
dimmable CFL and dimmable - memorisation of last dimming power, can be driven by EV106
LED lamps. level or EV108.
- protection against overheating. A dimmer can drive up to 30 bal-
lasts: the total power depends
on the lamps power.

17,5 mm qtya
Universal dimmers 300 W standard version 1 1 EVN011
- compatible with dimmable CFL

and LED comfort version 1 1 EVN012
- 3 modes for load learning: auto, - expert mode
advanced, expert (comfort version) - scene by 2 short double pres-
- can replace a latching relay, with ses on the remote PB
lighting level function (progressive switch-off, night
- push button (phase or neutral) light, 100%, no function)
EVN011 - very low consumption
Universal dimmers 500 W standard version 2 1 EVN002
- compatible CFL and LED

- 3 modes for load learning: auto, comfort version 2 1 EVN004
advanced, expert (comfort version) - expert mode
- very low consumption - 100% via 2 short presses on
the dim input PB
- 1 scene PB (scene,
EVN004 time-delayed scene, progressive
switch-off, night light)
- multi-voltage dim PB
Commercial dimmers 1000 W standard version 5 1 EV100
- mode selection switch:

“local”: autonomous operating advanced version 5 1 EV102
“slave”: 1/10V input - 2 scene PB (scene or override)
“master” (EV102 only): 1/10V output - dimming level display
- min. and max. dim level - adjustable parameters
(min. and max. dim level, dim-
EV100 ming rise time, rise time when
switching on and off)
1/10V pilot dimmers standard version 4 1 EV106
- to control electronic ballast or

EV100/EV102 dimmers (max. 30) advanced version 4 1 EV108
- dim level display - 2 scene PB (scene or override)
- adjustable parameters
(min. and max. dim level, dimming
EV108 rise time, rise time when switching
on and off)
Heat dissipation insert 1/2 12 LZ060
LZ060
D.62
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 178
dimmers

17.5mm qty.
Universal dimmer 1000 W for : 230 V / 50 Hz 5 1 EV100

• Functional mode selection via
local switch : 20 ...1 000W
- control via pushbutton (local)
- remote control via 1/10V 1/10V-input
(slave)
• Min/Max setting via
potentiometer
• LED indication :
EV100 - 230V power supply/load error
- overload / overheating
Load type :
- incandescent
- 230V halogen lamps
- VLV halogen lamps associated
to ferromagnetic transformer
(inductive)
- VLV halogen lamps associated
to electronic transformer
(capacitive)
Universal dimmer 1000 W with 230 V / 50 Hz 5 1 EV102

scene inputs
• Functional mode selection via 20 ...1 000W
local switch :
- control via pushbutton (local) 1/10V-input/output
- remote control via 1/10V (slave) (max. 50mA, 30 EV100 / EV102)
- control of the other dimmers defined via the local switch
via 1/10V (master)
Contact output :
• Display to show the dim level 1 NO, 250V , μ 5A
EV102 and to set the parameters:
- dimming rise time (4s ..99s)
- min dim level (0...49%)
- max dim level (51..99%)
- rise time when switching ON
(1s..99s)
- fall time when switching OFF
(1s..99s)
- scene level
- dimming rise time for each
scene
- scene working mode :
recall or override mode
• Output contact to display the
dim state (load is OFF, contact is
opened, if load is dimmed the
contact is closed)
• LED indication :
- 230V power supply / load error
- overload / overheating
Load type :
- incandescent
- 230V halogen lamps
- VLV halogen lamps associated to
ferromagnetic transformer
(inductive)
- VLV halogen lamps associated to
electronic transformer
(capacitive)
D.63
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 179
dimmer system: 1/10V pilots
EV106 and EV108 pilot • Min/max level setting EV108 pilot dimmer
dimmers • Contact output for state • Scene inputs used for override
• To control several dimmers or information (3 levels) or simple recall
electronic ballasts via the • Dimming rise time setting (2 levels).
1/10V output • Setting of rise time and fall
• Display to show the dim level time
and for parameter setting Use :
• Wiring of illuminated to control lighting in meeting and
pushbuttons possible up to conference rooms, or in
5mA restaurants

17.5mm qty.
1/10V pilot dimmer 230 V / 50 Hz 4 1 EV106
• To control 1/10V - interface

EV100 and EV102 (max. 30) Output /max 50mA
• To dim electronic ballasts
• Wiring of illuminated Contact output :
pushbuttons possible up to 1 NO, 250 V μ10 A
5mA
• Display to show the dim level
and to set the parameters:
EV106 - dimming rise time (4 s ..99s)
- min dim level (0..49%)
- max. dim level (51..99%)
Contact output to display the

dim state (load is OFF, contact is
opened, if load is dimmed the
contact is closed). It is used to
switch ON/OFF the electronic
ballast
1/10V pilot dimmer with scene input 4 1 EV108

In addition to EV106 features :
• Scene inputs used for override (3 levels) or simple recall (2)
• For each scene
- dimming rise time
- scene level
- and scene mode (recall or- override)
EV108
D.64
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 180
dimmers
EVN011 EVN012 EVN002 EVN004 EV100 EV102 EV106 EV108

Supply voltage 230 V +/- 10 %
Frequency 50/60 Hz 50 Hz
Load consumption 0,2 W 3W
Load control type direct through dimmer
Remote power 300 W 500 W 20 à 1000 W contact 10 A - 230 V
Compatible load types :
- incandescent 230 V 300 W 500 W 1000 W -
- halogen 230 V 300 W 500 W 1000 W -
- VLV halogen with transformer 300 VA 500 VA 1000 VA -
- dimmable fluocompact 60 W 100 W - -
- fluocompact and LED not dimmable - - - -
- dimmable LED 230 V 60 W 100 W - -
1/10 V control - 1 input 1 input/ 1 output
output
1/10 V control status - slave slav./mast. master
I max. authorized for PB light 5 mA - 5 mA -
max. PB-dimmers distance 50 m
or 1-10 V control
dim PB and ON/OFF on module no yes
Number of preset lighting levels - 1 - 2 - 3
Preset lighting levels control entry - 1 - 2 - 2
Min. and max. dim lighting setting - yes
On/Off status indication output - 1 contact O -
Values digital display - yes
Max. power dissipation 2,1 W 4,5 W 15 W 6W
IP IP 20
Operating temperature - 10°C to + 45°C
Storage temperature - 25°C to + 70°C - 20°C to + 60°C
Rigid connection 1,5 to 6 mm2 1,5 to 10 mm2
Flexible connection 1 to 6 mm 2
1 to 6 mm2
Wiring diagrams
EVN011 - EVN012 EVN002 EVN004
3
4
ε E1 E2 E1
Ph/N
Ph/N
Ph
N
ε
L1 N
Use the same phase for L2 L1
control and supply. N L2
L3
+ 24 V
Do not forget to connect the 2

neutral points.
D.65
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 181
dimmers
Wiring diagrams
EV100 EV102
Ph Ph
N N
Switch
control: level
forcing
slave
charge indication contact

output state
EV106 EV108
Ph Ph
N N
D.66
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 182
dimmers
Association of dimmer EV102 with EV100
mode switch in position “master”

= output 1/10 V.
mode switch in position “slave” =
input 1/10V (in this position only
priority settings with E1 and E2 are
available)
E1 E2
Remark : it is possible to extract
temporarily a product from system
by switching from “slave” to “local”.
Use of input E1 and E2

(call of set up levels)
Inputs E1 and E2 allow to call 2 or 3
set up lighting ambient levels. Call of
levels can be done normally with
push button (impulse ≤ 400 ms) or by
priority setting with switch or auto-
mation (maintained contact).
Setup mode 1 or 2 allows to
discriminate behaviour of dimmer by
cancellation of priority setting.
• mode 1 (by default), corresponds

to normal use.
- Control by push button, called level
is applied out of respect of set up
transition. Dimmer still reacts to the
other controls applied.
(E1 + E2)
- Switch control, called level is
applied by priority setting out of
respect of
setted up transition.
By cancellation of priority setting,
lighting remains at the same level as
EV106
long as no other control is given.
• mode 2, particularly adapted for

priority setting. Same behaviour as
above by call of level.
By deactivation of priority setting,
dimmer set back to the preceding
state. In that mode, when the 2
entries are simultaneously active, a
3rd level becomes available in priority
setting (E1+E2 = E3)
D.67
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 4/9/12 2:23 PM Page 183
dimmers
Safety instructions for dimmers

EV001, EV012, EV002, EV004, EV100, EV102:
• These dimmers are not suitable for dimming electronic ballast
units.
• When using with a conventional transformer there may be
transformer losses of approx. 20 percent.
The transformer used should not be operated at less than 75
percent of its rated capacity.
• When using with an electronic transformer there may be
transformer losses of approx. 5 percent.
• it is also important to observe the advisory notes and
instructions issued by the lamp manufacturers.
• the correct operating temperature must be ensured. A dimmer
should be installed in the lower area of the distributor.
Technical data Reference Technical data Reference

Control device EV106 EV108 Remote control dimmers EV106 EV108
Dimensions 4 PLE Dimming range limits yes
with Display
reference voltage 230 V AC (+10% /-15%), 50 HZ
min. 1 - 49 %
Power dissipation 3W max. 51 - 99 %
System interface Master (OUT 1 - 10 V: passive, Dimming speed
current sink, max. 50 mA or (normal dimming) Settable
30 EV100 or EV102 0 - 100 %
4 s - 99 s
Display for parameters and yes 0 - 99 %
brightness Activation of automatic level / not available 230 Volts inputs
preferred scene
relay output/ yes
status signalling 1 normally open contact 10 A Soft-dim-up and soft-dim Settable
dimming value at output down 0 - 100 %
0 % -> open contact 1s - 99s
>0% -> close contact
Memory function yes yes
remote control of pushbutton yes
Soft start yes yes
illuminated pushbuttons yes quiescent current up to 5 mA
Connection cage terminals
Dimming and ON/OFF 3 buttons 2
flexible 1 - 6 mm
on the device itself 1 button to dim-up-; 2
rigid 1,5 - 10 mm
1 button to dim down
1 button to switch line length max. 50 m
pushbutton inputs max. 50 m
Automatic level control / no 3 automatic
control interface
preferred scene recall levels or 2
preferred scenes ambient temperature -20°C to +60°C
settable on the storage -10°C to +45°C
device operation
Brightness
settable on the
device 0-99%
D.68
D.68
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 184
emergency lighting module
Application cally in case of power failure. Connection capacity :

2
for residential and commercial It can also be withdrawn from its 4 mm flexible/rigid wire
premises. base, thereby acting as a mini
torch with an operating duration
Installed in a consumer unit or of 1 hour 30min.
distribution board, the lamp can
be configured to light automati-
Designation Width in ❚ Pack Cat. Ref.

17.5mm qty.
Emergency lighting module 3 1 EE960
EE960
remote controls for emergency light blocks

The remote control device swit- The remote control is emergency lighting, by delivering
ches self contained recommended in premises for polarized current impulses on
emergency lighting into neutral public and in industrial or the
position or into working position. commercial premises. remote control circuits (+ or -)
It permits each day after closing The device is a 2 position Connection capacity :
2
down of premises, to switch off changeover switch, with 6 mm flexible wire
2
self contained emergency automatic recall for switching off 10 mm rigid wire
lighting to avoid the discharge of or on, of self contained
battery.

17.5mm qty.
Remote control power supply : 4 1 EE905

230 V 50/60 Hz
to control up to 60 self
contained, output supply : 8,4 V ...
with an average consumption time delay for power supply :
of 0,1 mA / 6 V 24 hours before activation of
remote control
EE910
Remote control power supply : 4 1 EE910
230 V 50/60 Hz
to control up to 120 self
contained, output supply : 12 V ...
with an average consumption time delay for power supply :
of 0,1 mA / 6 V 24 hours before activation of
remote control
D.69
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 185
modular emergency lighting EE960
Technical specifications Electrical connection
- supply voltage : 230 V
- load time : 36 h
- autonomy / load 24 hours : 1 hour
- autonomy / load 36 hours : 1,5 hours
- working life : 500 cycles
- illumination at 1 m : 4 lumens
- illumination at 0,5 m : 16 lumens
Environment
- working temperature : 0 to +40 °C
- storage temperature : -5 to +50 °C
1 to 4 mm2
With emergency light EE960, you will always have a small pocket switch
lamp :
- easy to find : the device is always on the board
- battery always loaded
Functional chart
voltage supply 230V position of state of LED state of lamp

switch
supply 230V «0» on red off

«1» on green off
no supply 230V «0» off off
or lamp removed LED
from socket «1» off on
remote controls for emergency light blocks
Technical specifications Electrical connection
general power
- supply voltage : 230 V +10 -15% 50/60 Hz supply cut of
- output impulse for control
EE905 : 8.4 V ... , EE910 : 12 V ...
consumption : EE905 = 3 VA local local
EE910 = 4 VA lighting A lighting B
ON
Functional characteristics OFF
security block A security block B
- number of remotable blocks
phone phone
EE905 : 60
EE910 : 120
Environment
- working temperature: -10 to +40 °C
- storage temperature : -20 à +80 °C
2
- flexible: 1 to 6 mm
2
- rigid : 1,5 to 10 mm
D.70
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 186
twilight switches
Description Applications Selection switch: 4 position override switch

The light sensitive switch Domestic and commercial (EE 100, EE 101, EE 110) allowing :
controls light systems according premises. 5 to 100 lux - auto : normal operation mode
to daylight level : 50 to 2000 lux - on : permanently switched-on
- the user sets the switching Complies with EN60730 - off : permanently switched-off
level - test : setting mode for easy
- the photo cell measures the Technical data adjustment
external light level. Supply : 230V +10%-15% 50Hz
1 changeover contact 16A 250V A light indicator when installing
shows the status “on” of the
contact.

17.5mm qty.
Twilight switch Adjustable 3 1 EE100

with surface cell 5 to 100 lux, 50 to 2000 lux
EE 003 Fixed ON/ OFF delay: 15 to 60s
Changeover 16A AC1 250V~
Twilight switch Adjustable 3 1 EE101

with flush cell 5 to 100 lux, 50 to 2000 lux
EE 002 Fixed ON/ OFF delay: 15 to 60s
Changeover 16A AC1 250V~
EE100
Programmable twilight Daily cycle 5 1 EE110
switch with surface cell electromech. switch
Programmable twilight Weekly cycle 3 1 EE170

switch with surface cell digital program
8 presetted programs
EE702 Programmable twilight Weekly cycle 3 1 EE171

switch with surface cell digital program
free setting
Compact twilight switch 10 or 30 lux - 1 EE701

IP 55 Integrated cell ON delay: 40s/ OFF delay: 120s
8A AC1
Adjustable: 2 to 2000 lux 3 1 EE702

Adjustable: 1s to 120s
EE002 16A: AC1
Flush cell IP54 for EE100, 101, 110 & 170 - 1 EE002
Surface cell IP54 for EE100, 101, 110 & 170 - 1 EE003
EE003
D.71
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 187
light sensitives switch, 2 channel up to 20000Lux
Light sensitive switch, 2 channel ON delay, OFF delay and a 10%

up to 20kLx hysteresis are inserted to avoid
hazardous switching.
EE200, 201, 202, 203
With those devices, the energy The test mode permits to set the
costs for the lighting are easy to lux level, the ON and OFF delay
reduced. The switching On/Off and the hysteresis are inhibited
can be achieved according the during the tests. The lux level
outdoor light level. can be defined for each channel
via a potentiometer.

17.5mm qty.
Two channels light sensitive 230 V 50/60Hz 4 1 EE200

switch up to 20000Lux
The lux level is measured via a 2 contact NO 16 A 250 V AC1
photo resistor
The output is switched on/off 2 state switch :
accordingly the pre defined - automatic
lux level Slave device when - test
used with an EE202/EE203
For each channel :
4 state switch to select
EE200 - ON
- OFF
- 2...200 Lux
- 200... 20 000 Lux
Potentiometer to set lux level

led to show the output state.
ON / OFF delay : 30s

Hysteresis : 10%
Two channels light sensitive 4 1 EE201

switch up to 20000Lux
EE200 with EE003 cell :
D.72
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 188
light sensitive switch, 2 channel up to 20000Lux

17.5mm qty.
Two channels light sensitive 230 V 50/60Hz 5 1 EE202

switch up to 20kLx, comfort
The device offers two functional 2 contact NO 16 A 250 V AC1
modes, that may be defined to
control both channels together. Potentiometer to set lux level
Automatic mode (mode 1) :

The switching ON/OFF of the Led to show the output state.
outputs is done accordingly the ON / OFF delay : 30s
lux level. Hysteresis : 10%
A time switch connected at
input E1 can be used to enable Input 1 : 230V input used to
or disable the automatic mode. connect a switch (eg : time
The input E2 used with a push switch, motion detector)
button permits to temporally
toggle the output state of both Input 2 : 230V input used to
channels. connect a push button (manual
(Example : the lighting has been switch ON/OFF of the light)
switched OFF via the automatic,
the push button may switch ON, 2 state switch :
the switching OFF occurs again - automatic
with the automatic). - test
Semi-automatic (mode 2) :
The input E1 is used to defined Potentiometer to set functional
EE202 authorization periods (presence mode :
230V at E1 means lighting is - mode 1
authorized). - derogation time for mode 2 :
During the authorization period, 1 min., 5 min., 10 min., 30min.,
the light is switched ON/OFF 45 min., 1h30, 2h
according the lux level. A push
button connected at input E2 For each channel :
permits to switch on/off the 4 state switch to select
light. - ON
- OFF
Out of the authorization period, - 2...200 Lux
the switching on duration is limi- - 200... 20 000 Lux
ted to the predefined duration
set via the potentiometer. Potentiometer to set lux level
Cascading feature : Led to show the output state.

Several EE202 may be connec- ON / OFF delay : 30s
ted together. A sensor is Hysteresis : 10%
connected at the master EE202,
the slaves get the measurement
from the master.
Two channels light sensitive switch up to 20kLxx 4 1 EE203

EE202 with EE003 cell :
D.73
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 4/9/12 2:29 PM Page 189
technical data - Twilight switches
EE100 EE101 EE110 EE170 EE171 EE700
Width in ❚ 17.5mm 3 3 5 3 3 -
voltage supply 230V +10/-15% 230V ±10%
frequency 50Hz 50/60Hz
consumption 1.5VA maximum 1VA
output 1 voltage free changeover contacts 1NO
Maximum switching capacity
AC1 16A / 250V 10A
230V halogen lamps 1000W
fluorescent lamps,
non compensated 1000W 2300W
fluorescent lamps, compensated 200W
fluorescent lamps compensated
in series 1000W
duo fluorescent lamps 1000W
lighting level : 2 ranges 5 to 100 lux and 50 to 2000 lux 2 to 1000 lux
ON and OFF delay 15 to 60 seconds ON 10s OFF 40s
mounting of cell surface flush * surface surface surface
programmable no no yes yes yes no
technology electromechan. digital
cycle 24 hours 7 days** 7 days
programming setting 15 min. 1 min. 1 min
accuracy +/- 6min/year +/-6min/year +/-6min/year
operating reserve accu lithium battery lithium battery
200h after total of 3 years total of 3 years
beeing of supply failure of supply failure
connected for
120h
Environment
working temperature -30°C to +60°C (cell) -10°C to +50°C (modular device) -25°C to +45°C
storage temperature -20°C to +60°c
Connection
maximum length between
cell and modular 50 meters
2 2
capacity (modular device) 0.5 to 4 mm 2.5 mm max
2 2
capacity (cell) 0.75 to 4 mm 0.75 to 4 mm
Note : * delivered with a 1m cable (2x0.75▫)

** 8 predefined programs
Cells EE002 EE003

Type flush mounting surface mounting
Dimension (mm) 89 x 48 x 32 25 x 25 x 20 hole ø 25mm
2 2
Connection cable 1m 2 x 0.75 mm 0.75 to 4 mm
Protection class IP54 IP54
Working and storage temperature -30°C to +60°C -30°C to +60°C
Wiring diagram
EE100 - EE101 - EE171 EE110 EE700
Ph
Ph Ph
N
N
N
7 8 9 10 11 12 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
EE 700
EE 100 N N L L
EE 110
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PE
D.74
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 190
two-channels twilight switches
Electrical characteristics EE200 EE202

Power supply 230 V AC +10/-15% 50 Hz
Consumption 2,4 W max.
Outputs 2 contacts NO
max. cut-off power 16 A 250 V AC1
incandescent lamps 2300 W
230 V halogen 2300 W
TBT halogen, ferromagnetic transformer 1500 VA
TBT halogen, electronic transformer 2300 W
series connection fluo tubes 3600 W
parallel compensated fluo tubes 1000 W 112 μ capacity
fluocompact with electronic ballast 450 W
fluocompact with traditional ballast 2300 W
State signalling LED one red LED per channel
Brightness and override range 2 to 200 lux or 200 to 20 000 lux : adjustable by channel
on or Off override by channel
Switching and release time delay 30s
Auto/test switch auto = normal operation

test = test of brightness threshold, the 30 sec. - time delay is not active in this mode
Selector of auto/semi-auto mode with time no yes, automatic or semi-automatic mode
delay
Time delay or semi-automatic mode - adjustable from 1 min to 2hr
Cascade mounting slave product can be chained only with a master or slave, max. chaining of 10 products
EE 202
Connection
max distance of inputs IN 1 or IN 2 50 m, input signal voltge of or 230 V
max. distance of chaining link by means of two non-polarised conductors of 1 to 6 mm2 with a maximum of 50 m
flexible cage terminal 1 to 6 mm2
rigid cage terminal 1.5 to 10 mm2
Environment
Operating temperature 0°C to +45°C
Storage temperature -20°C to +60°C
Functions of EE 202
Automatic mode : Semi-automatic (mode 2) :
(potentiometer in mode 1 position) in this mode, E1 input is used to define authorization periods
In this mode, the twilight switch controls outputs if the brightness is (230V presence on input IN1).
too low and provided E1 input is activated (230V presence). A push-button connected to E2 input makes it possible to switch
An override push-button connected to IN2 input makes it possible to lighting on/off.
reverse the state of lighting areas. Outside authorization periods, the switch-on duration is delayed. The
Lighting is switched off automatically as soon as E1 is deactivated time period of such a timer is set via a potentiometer.
(0V) Within the authorization period, switch-on can be carried out by
pressing the push-button.
Then, the control of the area depends on brightness threshold
associated with each output.
Electrical diagrams
EE200 EE202
Ph Ph Ph
N N N
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
aut o aut o aut o aut o

test test test test
mode 2 mode 2 mode 2
mode 1 mode 1 mode 1
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
E1 E2
EE 202
Ph Ph
*
* the chaining link is used to transmit brightness dat to several products in order to increase
the number of controlled thresholds and circuits.
D.75
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 191
remote telephone interface
Telephonic remote control :

It allows to command, from any
fixed or mobile telephone,
turning on/off, of different
electrical circuits.

17.5mm
Telephone gateway, 3 inputs, Electrical characteristics : 5 TH020B

3 outputs power supply : 230V, +/-15%,
50/60Hz
Functions Consumption : 2W
- remote control : 3 relay outputs Analog telephone line (PSTN),
- status indication : for each 48VDC
output 3 relay output 5A-250V AC1
- convivial voice guide in English 1 temperature measurement,
- remote alarm detection and CTN 10kOhm
sending of voice messages 2 alarm inputs : 1 input 0-
towards 3 programmed tele 30VAC/DC, 5mA min
phone numbers 1 input 0-230V AC, 5mA min
- recording of your own Power shutdown detection
messages
- voice messages for room Environment :
temperature indication working temperature : 0/+50°C
possibility to use together with Storage temperature : -20/+70°C
an answering machine on the IP 30, IK03
TH020B
same telephone line
Personal secret code to limit Connection :
access to the device flexible 2*2.5mm2 max
Timed switch-off of the relay rigid : 2*2.5mm2 max
output (from 1 second up to
59h 59min 59sec)
D.76
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 192
Electrical characteristics Size

- 5 modules
- power supply : 230 V AC ± 15% 50/60 Hz
- consumption : < 2 W Environment
- analog telephone line : 48V DC - working temperature : 0 °C to +50 °C
- output relays : 250 V/5 A AC1 - storage temperature : -20 °C à +70 °C
- class of insulation : II
- technical alarm inputs :
- protection index : IP 30 IK 03
1 input 0-30 V AC/DC, 5 mA mini
switching threshold : 7V, +/- 1V Connection
1 input 0-230 V AC, 5 mA mini - capacity : flexible / rigid conductor 1 x 0,75 mm2 mini
- switching threshold : 100 V, +/-40% - 2 x 2,5 mm2 maxi
- screw : PZ1
- temperature input : CTN 10 kOhm
- battery reserve : 4 hours Standards
- charging time : 72 hours - European Telecom Approval : TS103 021
Electrical connection
Tel .*
24V Fi l t r e Modem
AC/ DC ADSL ADSL
( opt i onne
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
L N IN 1 IN 2
TH 020A / B / C
Out 1 Out 2 Out 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
sonde de
t empér at ur e
CTN 10 kΩ
( opt i onnel l e) * *
* Lightning protector of telephone line inputs is recommended.

** Recommended termperature probe : EK 081,
EK 083, EK 086.
Inputs : IN 1 : 0-30 V AC / DC - 5 mA min.
IN 2 : 0-230 V AC - 5 mA min.
Use BT/TBT interface relay
Outputs : OUT 1, 2, 3 : relays 5 A, AC1
Please provide separate tracking for power supply cables

and temperature sensor cable.
D.77
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 193
voice assistance
user recorded messages
alarm input n°1 - n°2 heating shifting form programming mode to frost
free mode
temperature probe and alarm lighting switch ON/OFF intrusion simulation...

inputs
analogue telephone line roller shutters Up/Down

(PSTN) input
230VAC power supply and network ... Other controls, spraying, pump...
failure detection
1 2 4 5
Power Phone
Fr ançai s
Deut sch
I t al i ano
On/ of f On/ of f On/ of f
Res et
OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3
3 6
Telephone jack indicator

Power indicator : product power supply
ON/OFF key : local control of output relay override
Relay status indicator
- indicator ON = relay ON
- indicator OFF = relay OFF
Language selection cursor
RESET key : reseting to factory setup+power indicator flickering
Menu parameters
- connect the remote control to the telephone network line

- dial your telephone number from an external dialing set
- follow voice assistance instructions to access Menu Parameters
This mode allows :

- to set voice assistance sound volume
- to personalize your access code
- to record your own voice messages
(the maximum time of each messages is 10 seconds),
- to program time delay circuit operation
- to define the number of rings before activation
(factory setting is 5 seconds)
- to configure technical alarms
D.78
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 194
Automatic detection
Optimized control & energy
consumption
The motion detector range is particularly adapted to building external lighting automation. It brings a
lot of benefits, such as: comfort, safety and energy saving.
Matching with different detection and installation specifications, the detectors are available with a
mounting set for wall and ceiling.
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 195
motion detector D81
360˚ detector D84
presence detector D85
floodlight with motion detector D86
smoke detector D91

2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 196
motion detector
Features : • Vertical and horizontal • Wall mounting with a wall Technical

• Large range: orientation and shutters to bracket that offers numerous Power supply:
from 200˚ basis to 220/360˚ adjusts the detection area wiring and mounting
comfort possibilities Basic detector
• Local seting time and lux via 230 VAC + 10% (50/60 Hz)
•• An IP55 reinforced potentiometers and quick set 10A AC1 relay and cutted phase
waterproofing feature to ease the setting Enhanced detector
230 VAC + 10%/ -15%
• Detection head with • Installation and wiring with
overmoulded fresnel lenses quick connect terminals Output:
and pyro detectors 16A AC1 relay potential free
Designation Detection Colour Pack Cat. ref.

angle qty.
Basic range
Lumimat S220 white/ Motion dector 200˚ white 1 EE830
Lumimat S220 anthracite/ Motion dector 200˚ anthracite 1 EE831
EE830 Lumimat S360 white/ Motion dector 360˚ white 1 EE840
Lumimat S360 anthracite/ Motion dector 360˚ anthracite 1 EE841
Enhanced range
EE840
Lumimat E220 white/ Motion dector comfort 220˚ white 1 EE860
Lumimat E220 white/ Motion dector comfort 220˚ anthracite 1 EE861
Lumimat TWIN white/ Motion dector comfort 220˚ + 360˚ = Twin white 1 EE870
Lumimat TWIN anthracite/ Motion dector 220˚ + 360˚ = Twin anthracite 1 EE871
EE870
EE871
Accessories
IR remote control / 1 EE806
Corner bracket for Lumimat S140/S200 white 1 EE825
anthracite 1 EE826
EE806
Ceiling bracket for Lumimat S140/S200 white 1 EE827
anthracite 1 EE828
Corner bracket for Lumimat S140/S220/TWIN white 1 EE855
anthracite 1 EE856
EE825
D.81
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 197
motion detector
EE820 / EE830 / EE840 EE821 / EE831 / EE841

colours white anthracite
detection range 140° / 200° / 360°
vertical head orientation tilt 0 to 30°
horizontal head orientation pan ± 80°
shutters delivered with the products
ceiling mounting w/ accessory EE827 (except EE840) w/ accessory EE828 (except EE841)
corner mounting (inner/outer corner) w/ accessory EE825 (EE855 for EE840) w/ accessory EE826 (EE856 for EE841)
Settings
lux setting via potentiometer 5 to 1000 lux
timer setting via potentiometer pulse ( 1s ON, 9s OFF) or timer 5s to 15 min
quick setting auto/test position
power supply 230V AC (+10% / -15%), 50Hz/60Hz
output 10A AC1 , relay cutted phase
Load type
incandescent load 1500W
VLV halogen lamps with conventional transformer 1500VA
fluorescent tubes with parallel compensation C= 32μF 290W
electronic ballast 580W
fluocompact 10 x 20W
Environment
IP 55
IK 04
working temperature -20°C to +55°C
Connection
terminals quickconnect with manual release
2
terminals capacity 1.5 mm rigid wires
Auto/OFF Auto/ON
Ph
L Ph’L’ Ph
L Ph’
L’
N Ph L’
L Ph’ Ż N Ph Ph’
L L’ Ż
Ph
L S1 Ph
L S1
S1 = OFF
N N
= auto
Detectors in parallel Combination with a timelag
1 2
EMN001
Ph
L Ph’
L’ EMN 001
Ph
L Ph’
L’ Ph
L Ph’
L’ 3
5
8
L L’
N Ph Ph’ L Ph’
N Ph L’ 30s
10
Ż min.
Ż Ż N Ph Ph’
L L’
N 3
Ph
L Ph
L 4
Ph
L
N N
Detection zone
The optimal height of installation
is 2,5 m.
8 m (α 200°)
6 m (α 140°)
The detection field must remain

2,5 m
free.
= 140°
α
EE82x:
EE83x: = 200°
6 m (α 140°)
8 m (α 200°)
8m 16 m
D.82
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 198
motion detectors
EE804 EE805
mounting wall mounted flush mounted
voltage supply 230 V AC
frequency 50 Hz
brightness level 5 to 1000 lux
lighting output operating time 5 s. to 15 mn
breaking capacity AC1 10 A
- incandescent 1000 W
- halogen 230 V 1000 W
- halogen ELV via ferro.transfo. 500 VA
- halogen ELV via electro.transfo. 500 VA
- non compensated fluorescent tubes 1000 W
- compensated fluorescent tubes 2 x 58 W or 3 x 36 W or 6 x 18 W
- electronic ballast 8 x 58 W
- fluocompact 10 x 20 W
terminal capacity 1 to 2,5 mm2
IP IP21 / IK03
working temperature 0°C to + 45°C
product dimension EE804 : Ø 105 x p.54 EE805 : Ø 85 x p.80
Detection area Mounting - Motion detectors 360°

EE804 - EE805 EE804 - EE805
ceiling mouting
They are particularly intended for use in interior traffic areas such as
corridors, entrance halls...
Dimensions
EE804 EE805
ø 75 mm
EE804 EE805
Operation Auto/OFF Operation Auto/OFF
N L L N
Green/yellow Green/yellow
(for tapping) (for tapping)
Verde / amarelo Bridging Bridging Verde/amarelo

(para transferência) Ponte Ponte (para transferência)
N N
230 V~ 230 V~
S1 L S1
L
Switch / Interruptor Switch / Interruptor
S1 Open = stop / S1 aberto = paragem S1 Open = stop / S1 aberto = paragem

S1 Closed = automatic mode / S1 fechado = modo automático S1 Closed = automatic mode / S1 fechado = modo automático
Operation Auto/ON Operation Auto/ON

N L
L N
Interruptor
Green/yellow
(for tapping) Green/yellow
(in option)
Switch
S1
Verde / amarelo Bridging Bridging

S1
(para transferência) Verde/amarelo

Switch
Ponte Ponte (em opção)

N
N
230 V~
230 V~
L
L
S1 Open = automatic mode / S1 aberto = modo automático

S1 open = automatic mode / S1 aberto = modo automático
S1 Closed = permanent switch on / S1 fechado = aceso em permanênci
S1 closed = permanent switch on / S1 fechado = aceso em permanência
D.83
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 199
360˚ motion detector
Features : • Adjustable ingtegrated • Mounting of Tectomat 360˚ S • Control of lighting by 8A

• Movement detector for the twilight switch function. flush fit on wire outlet, on volt-free contact.
automatic control of lighting in connecting box or on
walk circulation zones. flush • Mounting of Tectomat 360˚ SE mouldings thanks to side • Mounting in parallel possible.
fitting or surface mounting. in a standard 75mm dia. wall pre-cutouts.
box and fastening by two
spring clips.
Designation Mounting Cutoff Contact Pack Cat. Ref

power qty.
Infrared movement
detectors for interior
lighting, ceiling mounted
Tectomat 360S Surface mounting 1000 W incan 1 EE804
EE804
Tectomat 360SE Flush fitting 1000 W incan 1 EE805
EE805
D.84
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 200
presence detector
Description Settings via potentiometers or Direct control of a light load

High performance presence via remote control EE807 Lux level and ON delay settings
detector that will be used in EE816 - presence detector for
premises or in passage areas, EE815 - presence detector light regulation 3 functional
where they increase comfort and ON/OFF modes
reduce drastically the DALi/DSI bus output
energy costs.
Customer remote control EE808
for override operation.

qty.
Presence detector switched phase 1 EE815

monobloc on/off 16A AC1 230V
power supply: 230V AC
detection angle 360°
Presence detector DALi/DSI bus 1 EE816

monobloc DALi/DSI power supply: 230V AC
EE816 for lighting regulation detection angle 360°
Remote control infra red remote control 1 EE807

for the settings
Remote control infra red remote control 1 EE808

for the customer
EE807
presence detector
Features :
• The double lens of the • Lights are inhibited from being • The Tectomat Presio IR • The 2 S version allows, in
Tectomat Presios offers an switched on if natural light is version allows maintaining, in addition, controlling another
exceptional fineness in sufficient in the room. addition to presence lighting circuit or vertilation. A
infrared detection. Micro detection, a constant pushbutton input is used to
movements are sufficient to • Master/slave operation, to illumination level by variation, override.
switch on and maintain the synchronise several detectors. regardless of the lighting
light on. They are particularly conditions. • IP41 reinforced waterproofing
adapted for controlling the • The orientable head allows
lighting of offices, conference adapting the detection zone
rooms, class rooms, etc. according to the room’s con
figuration.
Designation Output Pack Cat.

qty. ref.
Presence detectors over 360˚ for

interior lighting, ceiling mounted
Tectomat Presio 1S 1 lighting output 1 EE810
Tectomat Presio 1S 2 output 1 EE811
EE810
Tectomat Presio 1R 1 x 1/10V output for light regulation 1 EE812
Accessories for surface mounting Presence detector 1 EE813
EE813
D.85
101132 SEA_D01-93.qxd_D 9/12/12 11:32 AM Page 201
floodlight with motion detector
Features :
- Halogen floodlights equipped - Integrated detector sensitive - Also allows controlling - IP55 reinforced waterproofing
with an infrared detector, to infrared radiation, for additional lamps for total
allowing easy replacement of functioning day and night, or maximum supplementary load
an existing lighting device in only at night. of 500W.
order to ensure automatic
lighting when a person or an
animal approaches. -
Designation Detection angle Cutoff Contact Pack Cat. Ref.

power qty.
Halogen floodlights equipped

with an infrared detector
Lumimat P150 black 140˚ 150 W 1 52035
Lumimat P150 white 140˚ 150 W 1 52038
Lumimat P150 black 200˚ 120 W 1 52545
52545
Lumimat P150 white 200˚ 120 W 1 52546
Lumimat P500 black 140˚ 500 W 1 52031
Lumimat P500 white 140˚ 500 W 1 52032
Lumimat P500 black 200˚ 500 W 1 52541
52546
Lumimat P500 white 200˚ 500 W 1 52542
D.86
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 202
presence detectors
EE810/EE811/EE812
detection areas
X
presence
zone de
h
area
présence
Y
7Y
mm
Y
traffic
passage traffic
passage
h 2,5m 3m 3,5m X
X
X 13 15,5 18
Y 7 8 9
Description Adjustment potentiometers

Signalling indicator
Lighting time delay 0 ... 90° V1 EE810 EE811 / TX510 EE812 / TX511
adjustment potentiometer
4
lux 1 test
4 5 auto
6
2 30
1 test
3
2
On
On On 50%
3 15 0%
40%
1
2
5 10
mini
1 min
1 6 1 min 30
15
4 10 5 1 30% 10%
4 3
30
test 5 5 20%
lux lux 15 5
10
min
➁ ➀ ➁ ➀ ➃ ➁ ➀ ➂
➀ on delay ➁ light regulation
➂ residual lighting ➃ time delay with the interlocking (output 2)
2 6 mode 1 : potentiometer > 10 s = time delay with the interlocking
15 min (use : correction of the setpoint, heating, etc.)
Brightness threshold
adjustment potentiometer Brightness mode 2 : potentiometer ≤ 10 s = time dealy with the interlocking
measurement sensor
15 s (use : ventilation/ventilation, synoptic lighting, …)
5
Detection lenses
References EE810 EE811 EE812 Test mode :

Type presence detector presence detector presence detector this mode makes it possible to validate the
detection area :
1 channel 2 channels 1/10V
- potentiometer ➀ in position “test”
Supply voltage 230V~ +10%/-15% / 50Hz - indicator V1 - ➃ will indicate any detection
Settings by lighting for one second if the level of
output brightness 1/3 potentiometer : auto (400 Lux) 5 to 1200 Lux, OFF illumination is lower than the preset
output temporisation 1 potentiometer : 1 - 30 min, test, impulsions (EE810) threshold. This lighting output S1 is not
output temporisation potentiometer : 30 s – 1 h controlled in this mode, the time settings will
2/3 remain ignored.
residual brightness - - Potentiometer Instances of lighting levels

0-50%
Breaking capacity position of Lux Application
output 1 (lighting) 16 A AC+, incandescent lamps, halogen: 10A AC1 potentiometer value
1500W 1 5 –
fluo with electronic ballast: 580W 2 100 corridor
fluo parrallel compensated: 290W/32μF
3 200 corridor, WC
output 2 (presence) - 2A AC1 4 100 VDU work
output 3 - - 1-10V 5 500 offices
(brightness setting) current : 50 mA
6 800-1200 classrooms
Input command - 230V 230V commutation / laboratory
50 m max. commutation dimming
ON measurement
LED OFF, auto, ON : movement/test of britghness
Power consumption 1,2 W 1,1 W 1W @inhibited
Ingress protection IP41
1 - 4mm2 regulation set paint is set at 400 Lux
Connection
storage: -10°C to +60°C
Temperature
working: 0°C to +45°C
D.87
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 203
presence detectors
Lighting measurement Detection zone

In addition to one density of higher detection, the difference Covering a rectangular detection zone of 13 x 7m, the Hager
between one presence detector and a conventional detector of presence detectors represent an ideal solution for the offices,
movements reside at the level of their principle of detection. The classrooms, toilets, corridors, markets and garages. In the event
detector of movements will be activated in the event of detection of assembly of two detectors in order to increase the range of
of movements in the darkness. If the latter is transformed into detection, it is then recommended to respect a zone of covering
lighting during the capture, the detector of movements will not of approximately a meter. Only two detectors will be thus
extinguish however the light. One presence detector must be necessary to cover a 25m length maket. A possibility of circuit
able to fill of such tasks and to make the difference between the Master/Slave exists for the commutation of only one group of
natural and artificial light. luminaries. The presence detector principal one (Master : EE812
The measurement of lighting carried out since the ceiling can be or EE811) measurement the lighting and the presence, then
different from the measured lighting, because it will be influenced commutates and controls the electic consumers. Auxiliary
by the provision of the windows, the form and the reflective presence detectors (Slave : EE810) detect only the presence and
properties of the walls and the pieces of furniture, etc will presence detector announce this one to principal, which will
measurement moreover will be delayed in order to avoid carry out commutation then by taking account of the lighting.
inopportune commutations. The diagrams of wiring are illustrated in the respective
instructions.
Presence detection
based on a solution patented by Hager, the optical part presence Assembly
detection rests on a double lens making it possible to obtain a The behavior of commutation will be determined by the passage
zone of rectangular capture of form. The head of the detector of people in the zone of capture of the detector. In exceptional
can also swivel to adjust the detection zone. The latter is subdi- cases, an inopportune commutation can be caused by various
vided in two sections equipped with a density higher than the influences. The sources of potential parasites should already be
center and a density to reduce in the direction lentgh. in the offi- evaluated during the study of the project, resp. eliminated before
ces, these detectors should thus be assembled directly above the assembly.
the places of work, resp. in the direction length for an installation
in corridors (zones of circulation). Obstacles decreasing the range of the detector :
• the partition walls, plants or racks, etc can limit the range of detection.
Simulated movements :
• the presence detectors capture fast modifications of
temperature in the environment of the detector as being
movements, for example at the time of or the stop starting of
lowers with hot air, ventilators etc when the flow of air is
directed directly on the lenses or of the objects near the zone
of capture of the detector.
• objects being heated slowly do not have a negative influence
and do not cause inopportune commutation.
A side distance > 0,5m should however be respected.
Proximity of the conduits of heating and the bodies of
radiators.
• luminaries switching on themselves and dying out near the
zone of detection can simulate a displacement (p e.g of the
movement presence movement lamps incandescence or halogen located at a distance < 1m).
detection detection detection • objects moving such as mobile machines, robots, posters can
13 x 7 m (installation max. high 2,5 m) also cause an inopportune detection.
Detection zone - scale 1:100 assembly height 2,5 m
D.88
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 204
presence detectors
EE810 EE811 EE811 Master + EE810 Slave
EE 810 EE 811 EE 811 EE 810
EE810/ EE810/
S1 Ph N S2 S1 Ph N S2 S1 Ph N S2 S1 Ph N S2
EE 810
HVAC
2A
2A HVAC
Ph Ph Ph N Ph N
Ph
N N N
EE812 + ballast, EE812 + EV100 / EV102 EE810 + EM001N / EM003
EE 812 EE 810
EMN 001
EE810/ 1/10V
Ph N S1 + - fluorescent lamps S1 Ph N S2
3
30s.
5
8
10
min
with ballast
Ph 3
ballast
-
+ N 4
Ph
N
1-10V Ph
Ph N
N
EE812 Master + EE810 Slave
EE 812
EE 812 EE 810
EE810/ 1/10V
Ph N S1 + -
EE810/ 1/10V
Ph N S1 + - S1 Ph N S2
-
Ph
+
N
EE 810
EV 100 / EV102
Ph -
Ph
N +
N
EV 100 / EV102
Ph
N
Apparent assembly Flush-mounted assembly
flush-mounted
case
pave
power
module support EE813 screw ø 3
(commutation) claws
metal leaf springs

plate
head of detection
D.89
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 205
presence detectors
EE815 EE816
detection range motion area: diameter 7m (product installed at 2.5m height)
presence area: diameter 5m (product installed at 2.5m height)
supply voltage 230 V AC +10% -15%
frequency 50/60 Hz
local lux threshold setting 5 to 1000 lux 3 modes available
local time setting 1 min to 1 hr
commissioning via installer remote control EE807 for power up, absence / presence EE807 for power up, absence / presence
mode, timer, active / passive cell mode, timer, active / passive cell
control with IR user remote control EE808 for ON/OFF override EE808 for ON/OFF override and dimming
up/down
output 16A AC1 relay output (cut live): 14V / 50mA (for a DALI bus with 24 ballasts)
- 2300W incandescent or 230V halogen: - No isolation between the mains and the
> 26000 cycles DALI bus !
- 1500W VLV halogen lamps with
ferromagnetic or electronic transformer:
> 35000 cycles
- 1000W / 130 μF parallel compensated fluo
tubes: > 50000 cycles
- 23 x 23W fluo-compact with electronic
ballast: > 20000 cycles
push button input phase input for absence / presence detection to dim up / down and absence / presence
(semi-automatic / automatic mode) detection(semi-automatic / automatic mode)
same phase as power supply same phase as power supply
2
terminals for 1,5mm rigid / flexible wires
power dissipation 300mW 60mW
isolation class II
protection IP41 / IK03
operating temperature -10°C to +45°C
standards IEC 60669-1, IEC 60669-2-1
Detection areas Mounting

h
t ceiling
10 < t < 28mm
h 2,5m 3m 3,5m
x 5m 5m 5m
x
y y 7m 8m 9m
6m
protective cover
2,5m
cable clamp
2,5m 2,5m
1m
Settings EE815 / EE816 Wiring diagram EE815 Wiring diagram EE816
auto L’ L N PB L N PB da+ da-

test 1
lux
2
on DALI ballast
1 min push
normally
for prese
button
detectio
20 min
1h L
230 V
L
230 V쓒
N N
D.81 D.90
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 206
smoke detector
Description : Fixing : Technical characteristics : - Operating temperature:

This optical smoke detector is Fixing with flush-mounting box - Type of detection: -10˚C -> +55˚C
intended for the protection of - For boxes of 60mm diameter: optical smoke detector
private apartments in buildings, Use holes marked 60 - Storage temperature:
or homes, mobile homes and - Average coverage: 50m2 -10˚C -> +60˚C
motor homes. - For boxes of 85mm diameter:
Use holes marked 85 - Use: interior - Protection class: IP32
It can be:
- used as standalone unit, or - Fix the base using suitable - Wired interconnection: - Dimensions (D xH):
- inter-connected in wired screws. up to 40 detectors. 125mm x 48mm
network of up to 40 detectors.
- Maximum cable length: - Weight: 210g
400m max
- Standard:
- Maximum cable diameter: DIN EN 14604 :2005
1.5mm2
Designation Colour Pack Cat. Ref.

qty.
Battery-operated smoke detector

9V alkaline battery White 1 TG500A
battery life: approximately 4 years.
possibility of using Ultralife lithium

battery with approximately Silver 1 TG500B
10 years lifespan
TG500A
Brown 1 TG500C
Mains powered smoke detector 230V

230V ~ / 9V alkaline battery White 1 TG501A
battery life: approximately 10 years
(no lithium battery)
Silver 1 TG501B
TG501B Brown 1 TG501C
D.91
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 207
Notes
D.92
2012_SEA_D01-93_D 31/8/12 11:38 AM Page 208
Notes
D.93

Hager

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hager

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

101132 SEA cover_2012-13.

pdf 1 9/24/12 5:38 PM

Hager Electro System Pte Ltd Tel + (65) 6383 1030

Hager Electro Ltd (Vietnam) Tel + (848) 3811 3549/50/51

,ULYN` KPZ[YPI\[PVU  )\PSKPUN H\[VTH[PVU catalogue

Dear Friends and Partners,

Hager stands for sustainability and our E3 Initiative is an

Innovation, customer proximity, simplicity and reliability

Why not have a browse and find out for yourself?

The partner for smart

Hager: a brand meeting your expectations

New ideas for the customers’ benefit

Switching with style - Safety and security items

Control and signaling

Energy & lighting control

Power interface programming

mini gamma | cosmos and icos | IU metal |

insulated busbars - prong | insulated busbars

miniature circuit breakers | remote control auxiliary |

BS 1361 / HRC fuse carries and fuse |

latching relays | relays & interface relays |

time switches and twilight switches selection chart |

dimmers | energency lighting module | twlight

motion, 360˚, presence, smoke detector |

Catalogue references index

Catalogue references index

Catalogue references index

Catalogue references index

Catalogue references index

Catalogue references index

mini Gamma enclosures A3

cosmos and Icos enclosures A4

vector enclosures - IP55 A7

vega enclosures A17

volta flush enclosures A20

orion plus metal IP65 enclosures A23

mini gamma enclosures

Designation Cat. Ref.

Designation Characteristics Cat. Ref. Cat. Ref.

Doors for : GD 102N GP102P GP102T

GD 106N GP106P GP106T

GD 108N GP108P GP108T

Key lock ---For plain or transparent door VZ313 VZ313

N - terminal 4 connections 2x16mm2 + 2x10mm2 GZ04N

Terminal support for GD 104 GZ104S

Designation Pack Cat. Ref. Cat. Ref.

1 row, 4 ❚ N : 2 x 16 + 2 x 10mm2 1 VF104PVA VF104TVA

1 row, 8 ❚ N : 3 x 16 + 3 x 10mm2 1 VF108PVA VF108TVA

1 row, 12 ❚ + 2 ❚ N : 5 x 16 + 5 x 10mm2 1 VF112PVA VF112TVA

Designation Pack Cat. Ref. Cat. Ref.

1 row, 4 ❚ + 1 ❚ N : 2 x 16 + 2 x 10mm2 1 VS104PVA VS104TVA

1 row, 8 ❚ N : 4 x 16 +5 x 10mm2 1 VS108PVA VS108TVA

1 row, 10 ❚ + 4 ❚ N : 1 x 25 + 5 x 16mm2 + 5 x 10 mm2 1 VS112PVA VS112TVA

1 row, 16 ❚ + 4 ❚ N : 1 x 25 + 8 x 16mm2 + 8 x 10mm2 1 VS118PVA VS118TVA

- IU metal enclosure IP41 - Powder coating to RAL 9002

- With rectangular knock-out - Removable top and bottom

- 1.2mm sheet steel, epoxy

Designation Modules Row Cat. Ref.

1 row, 13 ❚ N: 13 x 16mm2 13 1 IU13S

2 rows, 26 ❚ N: 2 x (13 x 16mm2) 26 2 IU26S

3 rows, 39 ❚ N: 3 x (13 x 16mm2) 39 3 IU39S

IU18S 4 rows, 52 ❚ N: 4 x (13 x 16mm2) 52 4 IU52S

,ULYN` KPZ[YPI\[PVU )\PSKPUN H\[VTH[PVU catalogue